This is the multi-page printable view of this section. Click here to print.

Return to the regular view of this page.

Database

It provides a service to easily create and manage relational, unstructured, and data analysis databases in a web environment.

1 - EPAS(DBaaS)

1.1 - Overview

EPAS (EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server) is Oracle-compatible RDBMS based on PostgreSQL. Samsung Cloud Platform provides EPAS Database as a Service (DBaaS) allowing you to use EPAS without separate installation and management.

EPAS(DBaaS) Service

Service Overview

EPAS(DBaaS) is a fully managed database service that provides an easy-to-use environment for creating, configuring, and managing EPAS databases. You can focus on application development and business logic without worrying about database installation, patching, backup, and recovery.

Service Architecture

EPAS(DBaaS) consists of the following components:

  • Database Cluster: A cluster of one or more database servers that provides high availability and load balancing
  • Storage: Block storage for storing database data, archives, and backups
  • Network: VPC-based network configuration for secure data transmission
  • Monitoring: Integrated monitoring and alarming through ServiceWatch

Service Features

EPAS(DBaaS) provides the following features:

  • Auto Provisioning: Automatically provision database servers with just a few clicks without manual installation
  • Operation Control: Easily start, stop, and restart database servers
  • Backup and Recovery: Automated backup and point-in-time recovery for data protection
  • Version Management: Support for multiple EPAS versions with easy upgrades
  • Replica: Create read replicas for scaling read operations
  • Audit: Database audit logging for compliance and security
  • Parameter: Database parameter management for performance tuning
  • Monitoring: Real-time monitoring and alerting for database health
  • User Management: Database user and permission management
  • Access Control: IP-based access control for enhanced security
  • Archive: Archive management for long-term data retention
  • Log Export: Database log export for analysis and troubleshooting
  • Migration: Easy migration from on-premises or other cloud databases
  • OS Kernel Upgrade: Automated OS kernel upgrades for security and performance

Engine Versions

EPAS(DBaaS) supports the following EPAS versions:

  • EPAS 14.17
  • EPAS 15.11
  • EPAS 16.4
  • EPAS 17.6

Server Types

EPAS(DBaaS) provides the following server types:

  • Standard: Standard specifications for general workloads
  • High Capacity: Large capacity servers with 24+ vCPU for high-performance workloads

Prerequisites

To use EPAS(DBaaS), you must have a VPC configured in your project. For more information on creating a VPC, see VPC Creation Guide.

1.1.1 - Server Type

EPAS(DBaaS) Server Type

EPAS(DBaaS) provides server types with various combinations of CPU, Memory, Network Bandwidth, and more. When creating an EPAS(DBaaS), the Database Engine is installed according to the selected server type based on the intended use.

The server types supported by EPAS(DBaaS) are as follows:

Standard db1v2m4
Classification
ExampleDetailed Description
Server TypeStandardClassification of provided server types
  • Standard: Composed of standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) commonly used
  • High Capacity: Server with higher capacity than Standard
Server Specificationdb1Classification of provided server types and generations
  • db1: Means general specifications, and 1 means the generation
  • dbh2: h means high-capacity server specifications, and 2 means the generation
Server Specificationv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server Specificationm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. EPAS(DBaaS) Server Type Format

db1 Server Type

The db1 server type of EPAS(DBaaS) is provided with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various database workloads.

  • Up to 3.3Ghz Intel 3rd generation (Ice Lake) Xeon Gold 6342 Processor
  • Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory
  • Up to 12.5 Gbps networking speed
ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
Standarddb1v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m322 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m126 vCore12 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m246 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m486 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m168 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m328 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m648 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m968 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m1288 vCore128 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m2010 vCore20 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m4010 vCore40 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m8010 vCore80 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m12010 vCore120 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m2412 vCore24 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m4812 vCore48 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m9612 vCore96 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m14412 vCore144 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m19212 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m2814 vCore28 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m5614 vCore56 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m11214 vCore112 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m16814 vCore168 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m3216 vCore32 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m6416 vCore64 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m12816 vCore128 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m19216 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m25616 vCore256 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Table. EPAS(DBaaS) Server Type Specifications - db1 Server Type

dbh2 Server Type

The dbh2 server type of EPAS(DBaaS) is provided with high-capacity server specifications and is suitable for large-scale data processing database workloads.

  • Up to 3.2GHz Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Xeon Gold 6448H Processor
  • Supports up to 128 vCPUs and 1,536 GB of memory
  • Up to 25Gbps networking speed
ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
High Capacitydbh2v24m4824 vCore48 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m9624 vCore96 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m19224 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m28824 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m6432 vCore64 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m12832 vCore128 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m25632 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m38432 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m19248 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m57648 vCore576 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m25664 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m76864 vCore768 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m28872 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m86472 vCore864 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m38496 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m115296 vCore1152 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m512128 vCore512 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m1536128 vCore1536 GBUp to 25 Gbps
Table. EPAS(DBaaS) Server Type Specifications - dbh2 Server Type

1.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

EPAS(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

The table below shows the performance monitoring metrics of EPAS (DBaaS) that can be checked through Cloud Monitoring. For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

EPAS(DBaaS) server monitoring metrics refer to the Virtual Server Monitoring Metrics guide.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnit
Active Locks [Access Exclusive]Access Exclusive Locks countcnt
Active Locks [Access Share]Access Share Lock countcnt
Active LocksActive Locks countcnt
Active Locks [Total]Active Locks total countcnt
Active SessionsNumber of Sessions in Active statecnt
Active Sessions [Total]Total number of Sessions in Active statecnt
Apply Lag TimeApply lag timemin
Check No ReplicationCheck No Replication valuecnt
Check ReplicationCheck Replication Status valuestatus
Connection UsageDB connection usage rate(%)%
Connection Usage [Total]DB connection count usage rate(%)%
DB Age MaxDatabase age (frozen XID) valueage
Exclusive LocksExclusive Locks countcnt
Idle In Transaction SessionsNumber of sessions in idle in transaction statecnt
Idle In Transaction Sessions [Total]Idle in transaction state Session total countcnt
Idle SessionsNumber of idle sessionscnt
Idle Sessions [Total]Total number of idle sessionscnt
Row Exclusive LocksRow Exclusive Locks countcnt
Row Share LocksRow Share Locks countcnt
Share LocksShare Locks countcnt
Share Row Exclusive LocksShare Row Exclusive Locks countcnt
Share Update Exclusive LocksShare Update Exclusive Locks countcnt
SlowqueriesNumber of SQL queries running for a long time (5 minutes or more)cnt
Tablespace UsedTable space sizebytes
Tablespace Used [Total]Table space sizebytes
Tablespace Used Bytes [MB]File system directory usage (MB)MB
Tablespaces [Total]File system directory usage (MB)MB
Transaction Time Max [Long]Long-running Transaction time (minutes)min
Transaction Time Max Total [Long]Long-running Transaction time (minutes)min
Wait LocksNumber of waiting lock sessions (by DB)cnt
Wait Locks [Long Total]Long duration (300 seconds) Lock waiting session countcnt
Wait Locks [Long]Number of Sessions waiting due to lock occurrencecnt
Wait Locks [Total]Total number of sessions waiting due to lock occurrencecnt
Waiting SessionsNumber of Sessions in Waiting statecnt
Waiting Sessions [Total]Total number of Sessions in Waiting statecnt
Table. EPAS(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

1.2 - EPAS(DBaaS) Creation Guide

EPAS(DBaaS) Creation

You can easily create an EPAS database instance with just a few clicks through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Note
For information on EPAS versions supported by EPAS(DBaaS), see EPAS Engine Versions.

To create an EPAS(DBaaS) service, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create button. The Create EPAS(DBaaS) page will appear.
  3. On the Create EPAS(DBaaS) page, enter the required information in each section and click the Complete button.
Section
Required
Description
ImageRequiredSelect the image and version
  • Image: EPAS version to use
  • Version: Detailed version information
Service InformationRequiredEnter service information
  • Service Name: Service name
    • Enter 3~20 characters using lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens (-)
  • Description: Description of the service
Database ConfigurationRequiredConfigure database settings
  • Cluster Name: Database cluster name
    • Enter 3~20 characters using lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens (-)
  • Server Type: Server type
    • Standard: Standard specifications for general workloads
  • DB User Name: Database user name
    • Enter 3~20 characters using lowercase letters, numbers, and underscores (_)
  • DB Password: Database password
    • Enter 8~16 characters using a combination of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters
  • DB Port: Database port
    • Enter 1024~65535
  • Character Set: Character set
    • Select UTF8 or EUC_KR
  • Storage: Storage settings
    • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
  • DATA: Storage area for table data and archive files
    • Select storage type (SSD, HDD)
  • Enter capacity in multiples of 8 in the range of 16~5,120
  • Additional: Additional storage for DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup
    • Select storage type (SSD, HDD)
  • Select storage purpose and enter capacity
  • Click + button to add storage, x button to delete
  • Enter capacity in multiples of 8 in the range of 16~5,120, up to 9 additional storages
User ManagementOptionalUser management settings
  • DB User Management: Create additional database users
  • IP Access Control: Set IP access policy
    • Enter IP in IP format (e.g., 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32)
  • Click Add button to add IP
Backup SettingsOptionalBackup settings
  • Backup: Enable or disable backup
  • Retention Period: Backup retention period (1~30 days)
  • Backup Start Time: Backup start time (00:00~23:00)
  • Archive Backup Cycle: Archive backup cycle (None, 1 hour, 30 minutes, 10 minutes, 5 minutes)
Audit LogOptionalAudit log settings
  • Audit Log: Enable or disable audit log
  • Audit Log Retention Period: Audit log retention period (1~30 days)
ServiceWatchOptionalServiceWatch settings
  • ServiceWatch: Enable or disable ServiceWatch monitoring
  • Metric Group: Select metric group to monitor
ParameterOptionalDatabase parameter settings
  • Parameter: Modify database parameters
  • Click + button to add parameter, x button to delete
EncodingOptionalEncoding settings
  • Client Encoding: Client encoding (UTF8, EUC_KR)
LocaleOptionalLocale settings
  • Locale: Locale (C, en_US.UTF-8, ko_KR.UTF-8)
TimezoneOptionalTimezone settings
  • Timezone: Timezone (Asia/Seoul, UTC, etc.)
TagsOptionalAdd tags
  • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value
Table. EPAS(DBaaS) Creation Configuration Items

EPAS(DBaaS) Resource Management

Operation Control

You can control the operation status of EPAS(DBaaS) resources.

Note
  • When stopping a resource, the database instance stops and data is not lost.
  • When starting a stopped resource, the database instance restarts and data is preserved.
  • When restarting a resource, the database instance restarts and data is preserved.

To control the operation status, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to control. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Start, Stop, or Restart button to control the operation status.

Service Status Synchronization

You can synchronize the service status displayed in the console with the actual service status.

To synchronize the service status, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the Refresh button to synchronize the service status.

Server Type Change

You can change the server type of an EPAS(DBaaS) resource.

Note
Changing the server type will restart the database instance. Service interruption will occur during the restart.

To change the server type, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to modify. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Server Type Change button. The Server Type Change popup will appear.
  5. Select the new server type and click the Confirm button.

Storage Addition

You can add additional storage to an EPAS(DBaaS) resource.

Note
Adding storage will restart the database instance. Service interruption will occur during the restart.

To add storage, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to modify. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Storage Addition button. The Storage Addition popup will appear.
  5. Select the storage purpose, type, and capacity, then click the Confirm button.

Storage Expansion

You can expand the storage capacity of an EPAS(DBaaS) resource.

Note
Expanding storage will restart the database instance. Service interruption will occur during the restart.

To expand storage, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to modify. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Storage Expansion button. The Storage Expansion popup will appear.
  5. Enter the new storage capacity and click the Confirm button.

EPAS(DBaaS) Termination

You can terminate an EPAS(DBaaS) resource.

Caution
  • Terminating a resource will permanently delete all data and cannot be recovered.
  • Please make sure to backup important data before terminating.

To terminate an EPAS(DBaaS) resource, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to terminate. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Terminate button. The Terminate popup will appear.
  5. Enter the service name to confirm and click the Confirm button.

1.2.1 - Connection

This section explains how to connect to EPAS(DBaaS) using pgAdmin.

Connection Scenario

The scenario involves connecting to EPAS(DBaaS) through a Bastion host in a VPC environment.

Note
For more information on creating a VPC, see VPC Creation Guide.

Prerequisites

  • VPC created
  • Subnet created
  • Public IP allocated
  • Internet Gateway created and attached
  • Security Group configured
  • Virtual Server (Bastion host) created
  • EPAS(DBaaS) created

Connection Steps

  1. Create VPC

    Create a VPC to host the EPAS(DBaaS) and Bastion host.

  2. Create Subnet

    Create a subnet within the VPC for the EPAS(DBaaS) and Bastion host.

  3. Allocate Public IP

    Allocate a public IP for the Bastion host to allow external access.

  4. Create and Attach Internet Gateway

    Create an Internet Gateway and attach it to the VPC to enable internet access.

  5. Configure Security Group

    Configure the security group to allow access to the EPAS(DBaaS) from the Bastion host.

  6. Create Virtual Server (Bastion Host)

    Create a Virtual Server to serve as the Bastion host.

  7. Connect to EPAS(DBaaS) using pgAdmin

    Use pgAdmin to connect to the EPAS(DBaaS) through the Bastion host.

Detailed Connection Steps

1. Create VPC
  1. Click All Services > Network > VPC menu.
  2. Click the Create button.
  3. Enter the VPC name and CIDR block.
  4. Click the Confirm button.
2. Create Subnet
  1. Click All Services > Network > Subnet menu.
  2. Click the Create button.
  3. Select the VPC created in step 1.
  4. Enter the subnet name and CIDR block.
  5. Click the Confirm button.
3. Allocate Public IP
  1. Click All Services > Network > Public IP menu.
  2. Click the Allocate button.
  3. Select the VPC and subnet created in steps 1 and 2.
  4. Click the Confirm button.
4. Create and Attach Internet Gateway
  1. Click All Services > Network > Internet Gateway menu.
  2. Click the Create button.
  3. Select the VPC created in step 1.
  4. Click the Confirm button.
5. Configure Security Group
  1. Click All Services > Network > Security Group menu.
  2. Click the Create button.
  3. Enter the security group name and description.
  4. Add inbound rules to allow access from the Bastion host to the EPAS(DBaaS) port.
  5. Click the Confirm button.
6. Create Virtual Server (Bastion Host)
  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu.
  2. Click the Create button.
  3. Select the VPC and subnet created in steps 1 and 2.
  4. Select the public IP allocated in step 3.
  5. Select the security group configured in step 5.
  6. Click the Confirm button.
7. Connect to EPAS(DBaaS) using pgAdmin
  1. Install pgAdmin on your local machine.
  2. Open pgAdmin and create a new server connection.
  3. Enter the connection information:
    • Host: EPAS(DBaaS) private IP address
    • Port: EPAS(DBaaS) port number (default: 5432)
    • Database: Database name
    • Username: Database username
    • Password: Database password
  4. Click the Connect button to connect to the EPAS(DBaaS).
Note
To connect through the Bastion host, configure SSH tunneling in pgAdmin or use an SSH client to establish a tunnel to the EPAS(DBaaS).

1.2.2 - Managing

This section explains how to manage EPAS(DBaaS) resources.

DB User Management

You can manage database users for EPAS(DBaaS).

Creating DB User

To create a database user, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to manage. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the DB User Management button. The DB User Management popup will appear.
  5. Click the Create button. The Create DB User popup will appear.
  6. Enter the user name, password, and privileges, then click the Confirm button.

Modifying DB User

To modify a database user, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to manage. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the DB User Management button. The DB User Management popup will appear.
  5. Click the Modify button next to the user you want to modify. The Modify DB User popup will appear.
  6. Modify the user information and click the Confirm button.

Deleting DB User

To delete a database user, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to manage. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the DB User Management button. The DB User Management popup will appear.
  5. Click the Delete button next to the user you want to delete. The Delete DB User popup will appear.
  6. Click the Confirm button to delete the user.

DB Access Control Management

You can manage access control for EPAS(DBaaS).

Setting IP Access Control

To set IP access control, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to manage. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the IP Access Control button. The IP Access Control popup will appear.
  5. Enter the IP address or CIDR block and click the Add button.
  6. Click the Confirm button to save the settings.

Modifying IP Access Control

To modify IP access control, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to manage. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the IP Access Control button. The IP Access Control popup will appear.
  5. Click the x button next to the IP address you want to delete.
  6. Click the Confirm button to save the settings.

Archive Management

You can manage archive settings for EPAS(DBaaS).

Setting Archive

To set archive, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to manage. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Archive button. The Archive popup will appear.
  5. Enable or disable archive and configure the settings.
  6. Click the Confirm button to save the settings.

DB Log Export

You can export database logs for EPAS(DBaaS).

Exporting DB Log

To export database logs, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to manage. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the DB Log Export button. The DB Log Export popup will appear.
  5. Select the log type and date range, then click the Export button.

Minor Version Upgrade

You can upgrade the minor version of EPAS(DBaaS).

Note
Minor version upgrade will restart the database instance. Service interruption will occur during the upgrade.

Upgrading Minor Version

To upgrade the minor version, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to upgrade. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Minor Version Upgrade button. The Minor Version Upgrade popup will appear.
  5. Select the target version and click the Confirm button.

Migration Configuration

You can configure migration for EPAS(DBaaS).

Setting Migration

To set migration, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to migrate. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Migration button. The Migration popup will appear.
  5. Enter the source database connection information and migration settings.
  6. Click the Confirm button to start the migration.

OS Kernel Upgrade

You can upgrade the OS kernel for EPAS(DBaaS).

Note
OS kernel upgrade will restart the database instance. Service interruption will occur during the upgrade.

Upgrading OS Kernel

To upgrade the OS kernel, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource you want to upgrade. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the OS Kernel Upgrade button. The OS Kernel Upgrade popup will appear.
  5. Review the upgrade information and click the Confirm button.

1.2.3 - Read Replica

This section explains how to configure read replicas for EPAS(DBaaS).

Creating Read Replica

You can create read replicas to scale read operations and improve performance.

Note
Read replicas are asynchronously replicated from the primary database. There may be a slight delay in data synchronization.

To create a read replica, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the primary database resource you want to create a replica for. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Create Read Replica button. The Create Read Replica popup will appear.
  5. Enter the following information:
    • Replica Name: Name of the read replica
    • Server Type: Server type for the replica
    • Storage: Storage configuration for the replica
  6. Click the Confirm button to create the read replica.

Configuring Read Replica

You can configure the settings of a read replica.

Modifying Read Replica

To modify a read replica, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the read replica resource you want to modify. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Modify button. The Modify Read Replica popup will appear.
  5. Modify the settings and click the Confirm button.

Promoting Read Replica

You can promote a read replica to a standalone primary database.

Caution
Promoting a read replica will break the replication relationship with the primary database. The promoted replica will become a standalone database and will no longer receive updates from the primary.

To promote a read replica, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the read replica resource you want to promote. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Promote button. The Promote Read Replica popup will appear.
  5. Review the promotion information and click the Confirm button to promote the replica.

Deleting Read Replica

You can delete a read replica.

Caution
Deleting a read replica will permanently delete all data and cannot be recovered.

To delete a read replica, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the read replica resource you want to delete. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Delete button. The Delete Read Replica popup will appear.
  5. Click the Confirm button to delete the read replica.

1.2.4 - DB Backup and Recovery

Users can configure backups for EPAS(DBaaS) through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and recover using the backed up files.

EPAS(DBaaS) Backup

To ensure users’ data is safely stored, EPAS(DBaaS) provides data backup functionality based on its own backup commands. Additionally, you can verify whether backups were performed normally through the backup history feature and delete backed up files.

Setting Backup

For information on how to set up backups for EPAS(DBaaS), see EPAS(DBaaS) Creation Guide.

To modify the backup settings of a created resource, follow these steps:

Caution
  • For stable backup, it is recommended to add separate BACKUP storage or sufficiently expand the storage capacity. In particular, if the backup target data exceeds 100 GB and there are many data changes, please secure additional storage equivalent to approximately 60% of the data capacity. For information on adding and expanding storage, see EPAS(DBaaS) Storage Addition and EPAS(DBaaS) Storage Expansion guides.
  • If backup is set, backup will be performed at the specified time after the set time, and additional charges will be incurred depending on the backup capacity.
  • If the backup setting is changed to Not Set, backup execution will immediately stop, and stored backup data will be deleted and can no longer be used.

To set up backup, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to set up backup. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Modify button in the Backup section. The Backup Settings popup will appear.
  5. To set up backup, click Enable in the Backup Settings popup, select the retention period, backup start time, and archive backup cycle, then click the Confirm button.
    • To stop backup settings, uncheck Enable in the Backup Settings popup and click the Confirm button.

Checking Backup History

Note
To set up notifications for backup success and failure, you can configure them through the Notification Manager service. For detailed usage guide on notification policy settings, see Creating Notification Policy.

To view backup history, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to check backup history. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup will appear.
  5. In the Backup History popup, you can check the backup status, version, backup start date/time, backup completion date/time, and capacity.

Deleting Backup Files

To delete backup history, follow these steps:

Caution
Backup files cannot be restored after deletion. Please make sure to verify that the data is unnecessary before deleting.
  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to check backup history. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup will appear.
  5. In the Backup History popup, check the file you want to delete and click the Delete button.

EPAS(DBaaS) Recovery

If recovery using backup files is required due to failure or data loss, you can recover based on a specific point in time through the recovery function. When EPAS(DBaaS) recovery is performed, a new server is created with the OS image at the time of initial provisioning, the DB is installed with the version at that backup point, and recovery proceeds with the DB configuration information and data.

Caution
To perform recovery, you need at least the same capacity as the data type Disk capacity. If the Disk capacity is insufficient, recovery may fail.

To recover EPAS(DBaaS), follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for EPAS(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the EPAS(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the EPAS(DBaaS) Resource list page, click the resource you want to recover. You will be directed to the EPAS(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Database Recovery button. You will be directed to the Database Recovery page.
  5. After entering the corresponding information in the Database Recovery Configuration section, click the Complete button.
    Item
    Required
    Detailed Description
    Recovery TypeRequiredSet the point in time the user wants to recover
    • Backup Point (Recommended): Recovery based on backup files. Select from the list of backup file points displayed in the list
    • User-Specified Point: Recover to a point desired by the user within the range of points where backup is possible. The recoverable period can recover from the first backup start time to 1 hour/30 minutes/10 minutes/5 minutes before the current time depending on the Archive backup cycle setting value. Select the date and time you want to backup
    Server Name PrefixRequiredRecovered DB server name
    • Enter 3~16 characters starting with lowercase English letters and using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
    • Actual server name is created with a postfix like 001, 002 based on the server name
    Cluster NameRequiredRecovered DB cluster name
    • Enter 3~20 characters using English letters
    • Cluster is a unit that groups multiple servers
    Service Type > Server TypeRequiredRecovered DB server type
    • Standard: Standard specifications generally used
    • High Capacity: Large capacity servers with 24vCore or more
    Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalStatus of resources with Planned Compute set
    • In Use: Number of resources in use among resources with Planned Compute set
    • Set: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
    • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by Planned Compute for each resource
    Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage settings used by recovered DB
    • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
    • DATA: Storage area for table data and archive files
      • Applied identically with the Storage type set in the original cluster
      • Enter capacity in multiples of 8 in the range of 16~5,120
    • Additional: DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup data storage area
      • Applied identically with the Storage type set in the original cluster
      • In recovered DB, only DATA, TEMP, Archive purposes can be added
      • Select Use and then enter the storage purpose and capacity
      • Click + button to add storage, x button to delete
      • Capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 in the range of 16~5,120, and up to 9 can be created
    Database UsernameRequiredDatabase username
    • Applied identically with the username set in the original cluster
    Database Port NumberRequiredDatabase port number
    • Applied identically with the port number set in the original cluster
    IP Access ControlOptionalService access policy settings
    • Sets access policy for IPs entered on the page, so separate Security Group policy settings are not required
    • Enter in IP format (e.g., 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32) and click the Add button
    • To delete an entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
    Maintenance WindowOptionalDB maintenance window
    • If you select Use, set the day of week, start time, and duration
    • It is recommended to set a maintenance window for stable DB management. Patch operations proceed at the set time and service interruption occurs
    • If set to Not Use, Samsung SDS is not responsible for problems caused by not applying patches
    TagsOptionalAdd tags
    • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
    Table. EPAS(DBaaS) Recovery Configuration Items

1.2.5 - Extension use

EPAS(DBaaS) Extension usage

Note
The list of extensions included in each EPAS version can be found on the PostgreSQL official page.

The list of Extensions that can be installed in the current database can be checked with the following SQL sentence.

SQL> select * from pg_available_extensions;

In EPAS(DBaaS), the items that are installed additionally, excluding the default Extensions included in each version, are as follows.

Extension NameDescription
pg_crona scheduler that allows job scheduling with cron syntax within the database
pgvectorVector data type and similarity search, etc. AI vector operation function provided
postgisGIS (Geographic Information System) provides spatial object storage and spatial query functionality
Table. EPAS(DBaaS) Extension Basic Installation Items

In addition to the above items, if additional Extension installation is required, please refer to Support Center > Inquiry for inquiries.

  • Once your inquiry is received, we will review and proceed with the installation. Please note that some Extensions may not work properly during Replica configuration and recovery.

1.3 - API Reference

API

1.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

1.5 - Release Notes

NEW
  • Added disaster recovery replica function
  • Added OS upgrade function
NEW
  • Added DB user management function
  • Added Archive management function
  • Added audit log export function
  • Added backup notification function
  • Added migration function
  • Added 2nd generation server
NEW
  • Launched EPAS(DBaaS) service

2 - PostgreSQL(DBaaS)

2.1 - Overview

Service Overview

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) is an open-source relational database management system (RDBMS). Samsung Cloud Platform provides an environment that automates PostgreSQL installation and performs management functions for operation through a web-based Console.

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) is designed as a high availability architecture considering storage-based data replication and failover time minimization. To prevent data loss, when the content of the Active server changes, it is synchronously replicated to the Standby server. Read-only servers called Replica for read load distribution and disaster recovery (DR) are provided up to 5. Additionally, in preparation for problems with the DB server or data, it provides automatic backup at a time specified by the user, supporting data recovery at a desired point in time.

Architecture
Figure. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Architecture

Provided Features

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) provides the following features.

  • Auto Provisioning: Database (DB) installation and configuration via UI, providing Active-Standby redundancy configuration based on storage replication. Automatic failover to Standby when Active server fails.
  • Operation Control Management: Provides function to control running server status. Start, stop, and restart possible for DB issues or to reflect configuration values. For HA configuration, users can directly perform Active-Standby node switching through Switch-over.
  • Backup and Recovery: Provides data backup function based on own backup commands. Backup time period and retention period can be set by user, and additional charges are incurred depending on backup capacity. Also provides recovery function for backed up data, where user performs recovery and separate DB is created, recovery proceeds to point in time selected by user (backup storage point, user-specified point). When recovering to user-specified point, recovery point can be set up to 5 minutes/10 minutes/30 minutes/1 hour before current time based on stored backup files and archive files.
  • Version Management: Provides version upgrade (Minor) function for some feature improvements and security patches. User can select whether to perform backup according to version upgrade, and if performing backup, backs up data before patch execution then performs DB engine update.
  • Replica Configuration: Can configure up to 5 Read Replicas in same/different regions for read load distribution and disaster recovery (DR).
  • Audit Settings: Supports audit function for major activities in database.
  • Parameter Management: Can modify DB configuration parameters for performance improvement and security.
  • Service Status Check: Checks final status of current DB service.
  • Monitoring: Can check CPU, memory, DB performance monitoring information through Cloud Monitoring service.
  • DB User Management: Manages DB account (user) information registered in DB.
  • DB Access Control Management: Can register and cancel access-allowed IPs based on DB accounts registered in DB.
  • Archive Management: Can set Archive file retention period (1~35 days) and Archive mode (On/Off) in DB server.
  • DB Log Export: Can export logs stored through Audit settings to user’s Object Storage.
  • Migration: Supports migration using replication method by synchronizing data with operating database in real time without service interruption.
  • OS Kernel Upgrade: Can upgrade OS Kernel for some feature improvements and security patch application.

Components

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) provides pre-verified engine versions and various server types according to open source support policy. Users can select and use according to the service scale they want to configure.

Engine Versions

Engine versions supported by PostgreSQL(DBaaS) are as follows.

Technical support can be used until the supplier’s EoTS (End of Technical Service) date, and the EOS date when new creation stops is set to 6 months before the EoTS date.

EOS and EoTS dates may change according to supplier policy, so please refer to the supplier’s license management policy page for details.

Provided VersionEOS Date (Samsung Cloud Platform New Creation Stop Date)EoTS Date (Community Technical Support End Date)
14.172026-07 (Scheduled)2026-11-12
14.182026-07 (Scheduled)2026-11-12
15.122027-06 (Scheduled)2027-11-11
15.132027-06 (Scheduled)2027-11-11
15.142027-06 (Scheduled)2027-11-11
16.82028-06 (Scheduled)2028-11-09
16.92028-06 (Scheduled)2028-11-09
16.102028-06 (Scheduled)2028-11-09
17.62029-06 (Scheduled)2029-11-08
Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Provided Engine Versions

Server Type

Server types supported by PostgreSQL(DBaaS) are as follows.

For details on server types provided by PostgreSQL(DBaaS), see PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Server Type.

Standard db1v2m4
CategoryExampleDetailed Description
Server TypeStandardProvided server types
  • Standard: Standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) generally used
  • High Capacity: Large capacity server specifications with 24vCore or more
Server Specificationdb1Provided server specifications
  • db1: Standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) generally used
  • dbh2: Large capacity server specifications
    • Provides servers with 24 vCore or more
Server Specificationv2vCore count
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server Specificationm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Server Type Components

Prerequisite Services

List of services that must be configured in advance before creating this service. For details, please prepare in advance by referring to the guide provided for each service.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual network in cloud environment
Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Prerequisite Services

2.1.1 - Server Type

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) server type

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) provides a server type composed of various combinations such as CPU, Memory, Network Bandwidth. When creating PostgreSQL(DBaaS), the Database Engine is installed according to the server type selected for the purpose of use.

The server types supported by PostgreSQL(DBaaS) are as follows.

Standard db1v2m4
Classification
ExampleDetailed Description
Server TypeStandardProvided server type distinction
  • Standard: Composed of standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) commonly used
  • High Capacity: Server specifications with higher capacity than Standard
Server specificationdb1Provided server type distinction and generation
  • db: means general specification, and 1 means generation
  • dbh: h means large-capacity server specification, and 2 means generation
Server specificationv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server specificationm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Fig. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) server type format

db1 server type

The db1 server type of PostgreSQL(DBaaS) is provided with standard specifications(vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various database workloads.

Up to 3.3Ghz Intel 3rd generation (Ice Lake) Xeon Gold 6342 Processor Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory Up to 12.5 Gbps of networking speed

ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
Standarddb1v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m322 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m126 vCore12 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m246 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m486 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m168 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m328 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m648 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m968 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m1288 vCore128 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m2010 vCore20 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m4010 vCore40 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m8010 vCore80 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m12010 vCore120 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m2412 vCore24 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m4812 vCore48 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m9612 vCore96 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m14412 vCore144 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m19212 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m2814 vCore28 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m5614 vCore56 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m11214 vCore112 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m16814 vCore168 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m3216 vCore32 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m6416 vCore64 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m12816 vCore128 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m19216 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m25616 vCore256 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) server type specifications - db1 server type

dbh2 server type

The dbh2 server type of PostgreSQL(DBaaS) is provided with large-capacity server specifications and is suitable for database workloads for large-scale data processing.

Up to 3.2GHz Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Xeon Gold 6448H Processor Supports up to 128 vCPUs and 1,536 GB of memory Up to 25Gbps of networking speed

ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
High Capacitydbh2v24m4824 vCore48 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m9624 vCore96 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m19224 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m28824 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m6432 vCore64 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m12832 vCore128 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m25632 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m38432 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m19248 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m57648 vCore576 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m25664 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m76864 vCore768 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m28872 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m86472 vCore864 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m38496 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m115296 vCore1152 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m512128 vCore512 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m1536128 vCore1536 GBUp to 25 Gbps
Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) server type specifications - dbh2 server type

2.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

The following table shows the performance monitoring metrics of PostgreSQL(DBaaS) that can be checked through Cloud Monitoring. For detailed instructions on using Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

For server monitoring metrics of PostgreSQL(DBaaS), refer to the Virtual Server Monitoring Metrics guide.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnit
Active LocksNumber of Active Lockscnt
Active Locks [Access Exclusive]Number of Access Exclusive Lockscnt
Active Locks [Access Share]Number of Access Share Lockscnt
Active Locks [Total]Total Number of Active Lockscnt
Active SessionsNumber of Active Sessionscnt
Active Sessions [Total]Total Number of Active Sessionscnt
Apply Lag TimeApply Lag Timemin
Check No ReplicationCheck No Replication Valuecnt
Check ReplicationCheck Replication Status Valuestatus
Connection UsageDB Connection Usage Rate (%)%
Connection Usage [Total]DB Connection Usage Rate (%)%
DB Age MaxDatabase Age (Frozen XID) Valueage
Exclusive LocksNumber of Exclusive Lockscnt
Idle In Transaction SessionsNumber of Idle In Transaction Sessionscnt
Idle In Transaction Sessions [Total]Total Number of Idle In Transaction Sessionscnt
Idle SessionsNumber of Idle Sessionscnt
Idle Sessions [Total]Total Number of Idle Sessionscnt
Row Exclusive LocksNumber of Row Exclusive Lockscnt
Row Share LocksNumber of Row Share Lockscnt
Share LocksNumber of Share Lockscnt
Share Row Exclusive LocksNumber of Share Row Exclusive Lockscnt
Share Update Exclusive LocksNumber of Share Update Exclusive Lockscnt
SlowqueriesNumber of Long-Running SQL Queries (over 5 minutes)cnt
Tablespace UsedTable Space Sizebytes
Tablespace Used [Total]Table Space Sizebytes
Tablespace Used Bytes [MB]File System Directory Usage (MB)MB
Tablespaces [Total]File System Directory Usage (MB)MB
Transaction Time Max [Long]Longest Running Transaction Time (minutes)min
Transaction Time Max Total [Long]Longest Running Transaction Time (minutes)min
Wait LocksNumber of Sessions Waiting for Locks (per DB)cnt
Wait Locks [Long Total]Number of Sessions Waiting for Locks for a Long Time (over 300 seconds)cnt
Wait Locks [Long]Number of Sessions Waiting for Lockscnt
Wait Locks [Total]Total Number of Sessions Waiting for Lockscnt
Waiting SessionsNumber of Waiting Sessionscnt
Waiting Sessions [Total]Total Number of Waiting Sessionscnt
Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

2.2 - How-to guides

Users can create PostgreSQL(DBaaS) service by entering required information and selecting detailed options through Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating PostgreSQL(DBaaS)

You can create and use PostgreSQL(DBaaS) service through Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Note
  • Please configure VPC’s Subnet type as General before creating service.
    • If Subnet type is Local, creating this Database service is not possible.
  • If storing large data of 2 TB or more, backup may take long time or DB performance itself may degrade. To prevent this, operational considerations are needed such as cleaning unnecessary data or moving old data to statistics collection environment

To create PostgreSQL(DBaaS), follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create PostgreSQL(DBaaS) button. You will be directed to the Create PostgreSQL(DBaaS) page.

  3. On the Create PostgreSQL(DBaaS) page, enter information required for service creation and select detailed options.

    • Select required information in Image and Version Selection section.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Image VersionRequiredProvides PostgreSQL(DBaaS) version list
      Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Image and Version Selection Items
    • Enter or select required information in Service Information Entry section.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Server Name PrefixRequiredServer name where DB will be installed
      • Enter 3~13 characters starting with lowercase English letters, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
      • Actual server name is created with Postfix like 001, 002 based on server name
      Cluster NameRequiredCluster name where DB servers are configured
      • Enter 3~20 characters using English letters
      • Cluster is a unit that groups multiple servers
      Service Type > Server TypeRequiredServer type where DB will be installed
      • Standard: Standard specifications generally used
      • High Capacity: Large capacity servers with 24vCore or more
      Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalStatus of resources with Planned Compute set
      • In Use: Number of resources in use among resources with Planned Compute set
      • Set: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
      • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by Planned Compute for each resource
      Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage settings used by DB according to purpose
      • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
      • DATA: Storage area for table data and archive files
        • Select storage type then enter capacity (For details on Block Storage types, see Creating Block Storage)
          • SSD: High performance general volume
          • HDD: General volume
          • SSD_KMS, HDD_KMS: Additional encryption volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management System) encryption key
        • Set Storage type is applied identically to additional storage
        • Enter capacity in multiples of 8 in range of 16~5,120
        • Must allocate separate TEMP storage for use as large Sort due to SQL execution or monthly batch may cause service interruption
        • Additional: DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup data storage area
          • Select Use then enter storage purpose and capacity
          • Storage type is applied identically with type set in DATA, capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 in range of 16~5,120
          • Click + button to add storage, x button to delete. Up to 9 can be added
          • Temporarily saves backup data in BACKUP storage before transmitting backup data
            • If backup data exceeds 100 GB and data changes are frequent, recommend adding separate BACKUP storage for stable backup, recommend setting backup capacity to about 60% of DATA capacity
            • If BACKUP storage is not added, /tmp area is used, and backup fails if capacity is insufficient
          • Only one Block Storage is allocated per service for Archive, TEMP, BACKUP storage
      Redundancy ConfigurationOptionalRedundancy configuration
      • If redundancy configuration is used, DB instance is configured divided into Active DB and Standby DB
      Network > Common SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in service are installed
      • Select if applying same settings to all installed servers
      • Select pre-created VPC and Subnet, IP, Public NAT
        • IP can only be auto-created
        • Public NAT function can be used only if VPC is connected to Internet Gateway, if Use is checked can select from IPs reserved in VPC product’s Public IP. For details, see Creating Public IP
      Network > Per-Server SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in service are installed
      • Select if applying different settings per installed server
      • Select pre-created VPC and Subnet, IP, Public NAT
        • Enter IP for each server
        • Public NAT function can be used only if VPC is connected to Internet Gateway. If Use is checked can select from IPs reserved in VPC product’s Public IP. For details, see Creating Public IP
      IP Access ControlOptionalService access policy settings
      • Sets access policy for IPs entered on page, so separate Security Group policy settings are not required
      • Enter in IP format (e.g., 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32) and click Add button
      • To delete entered IP, click x button next to entered IP
      Maintenance WindowOptionalDB maintenance window
      • If Use is selected, set day of week, start time, duration
      • Recommend setting maintenance window for stable DB management. Patch operations proceed at set time and service interruption occurs
      • If set to Not Use, Samsung SDS is not responsible for problems caused by not applying patches
      Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Service Information Entry Items
    • Enter or select required information in Database Configuration Required Information Entry section.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Database NameRequiredServer name applied when installing DB
      • Enter 3~20 characters starting with English letters, using English letters and numbers
      Database UsernameRequiredDB user name
      • Account is created with this name in OS as well
      • Enter 2~20 characters using lowercase English letters
      • Database usernames with restricted use can be checked in Console
      Database PasswordRequiredPassword to use when accessing DB
      • Enter 8~30 characters including English letters, numbers, and special characters (excluding " )
      Database Password ConfirmRequiredRe-enter password to use when accessing DB identically
      Database Port NumberRequiredPort number required for DB connection
      • Enter DB port in range of 1200~65535
      Backup > UseOptionalWhether to use backup
      • Select Use to set backup file retention period, backup start time, Archive backup cycle
      Backup > Retention PeriodOptionalBackup retention period
      • Select backup retention period, file retention period can be set 7~35 days
      • Additional charges are applied to backup files depending on capacity
      Backup > Backup Start PeriodOptionalBackup start time
      • Select backup start time
      • Minutes when backup is performed are set randomly, backup end time cannot be set
      Backup > Archive Backup CycleOptionalArchive backup cycle
      • Select Archive backup cycle
      • Archive backup cycle of 1 hour is recommended. When selecting 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, may affect DB performance.
      Audit Log SettingsOptionalWhether to save Audit Log
      • Select Use to set Audit Log function
        • DDL, DML, user connection information records are saved
          • User can specify SQL statement types to Audit through log_statement parameter, can modify through Parameter screen
        • DB performance may degrade when Audit is set
      ParameterRequiredParameters to use in DB
      • Can check detailed information of parameters by clicking View button
      • Parameters can be modified after DB creation is complete, must restart DB after modification
      Database EncodingRequiredCharacter encoding method to use in DB
      • Character set used when storing text data
      • DB is created with default setting to selected Encoding
      DB LocaleRequiredLocale to use in DB
      • Settings related to string processing, number/currency/date/time display format
      • DB is created with default setting to selected Locale
      TimezoneRequiredStandard time zone where Database will be used
      Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Database Configuration Items
    • Enter or select required information in Additional Information Entry section.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Can add up to 50 per resource
      • Click Add Tag button then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Additional Information Entry Items
  4. On Summary panel, check created detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check created resource on Resource List page.

Checking PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detailed Information

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) service can check and modify overall resource list and detailed information. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page is composed of Detailed Information, Tags, Operation History tabs, and for DB with Replica configured, Replica Information tab is additionally configured.

To check detailed information of PostgreSQL(DBaaS) service, follow these steps.

  1. Click All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to check detailed information. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
    • At the top of PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page, status information and additional feature information are displayed.
      CategoryDetailed Description
      Cluster StatusStatus of cluster where DB is installed
      • Creating: Cluster creation in progress
      • Editing: Cluster changing to state performing Operation
      • Error: Cluster state where error occurred during task execution
        • If occurring continuously, contact administrator
      • Failed: Cluster failed during creation process
      • Restarting: Restarting cluster
      • Running: Cluster operating normally
      • Starting: Starting cluster
      • Stopped: Cluster stopped
      • Stopping: Stopping cluster
      • Synchronizing: Synchronizing cluster
      • Terminating: Deleting cluster
      • Unknown: Cluster status unknown
        • If occurring continuously, contact administrator
      • Upgrading: Cluster changing to state performing upgrade
      Cluster ControlButtons that can change cluster status
      • Start: Start stopped cluster
      • Stop: Stop running cluster
      • Restart: Restart running cluster
      • Switch-Over: Switch Standby cluster to Active
      Additional Features MoreCluster-related management buttons
      • Service Status Sync: Check real-time DB service status
      • Backup History: If backup is set, check backup normal execution and history
      • Database Recovery: Recover DB based on specific point in time
      • Parameter Management: Can check and modify DB configuration parameters
      • Replica Configuration: Configure Replica which is read-only cluster
      • Replica Configuration (Other Region): Configure disaster recovery Replica in other region, button disabled if no region configured in that Account
      • DB User Management: Check and manage DB account (user) information registered in DB
      • DB Access Control Management: Can register and cancel access-allowed IPs based on DB accounts registered in DB
      • Archive Settings Management: Can set Archive file retention period and Archive mode
      • DB Log Export: Can export logs saved through Audit settings to user’s Object Storage
      • Migration Configuration: Provides Migration function of replication method
      • OS(Kernel) Upgrade: Upgrade OS Kernel version
      Service TerminationButton to terminate service
      Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Status Information and Additional Features

Detailed Information

On PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, check detailed information of selected resource, and modify information if necessary.

CategoryDetailed Description
Server InformationServer information configured in that cluster
  • Category: Server type (Active, Standby, Replica)
  • Server Name: Server name
  • IP:Port: Server IP and port
  • Status: Server status
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In DB service, means cluster SRN
Resource NameResource name
  • In DB service, means cluster name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in service
CreatorUser who created service
Creation Date/TimeDate/Time when service was created
ModifierUser who modified service information
Modification Date/TimeDate/Time when service information was modified
Image VersionInstalled DB image and version information
  • If version upgrade is needed, click Modify icon to set
Cluster TypeCluster type (Master Cluster, Replica Cluster, Migration Cluster)
Cluster NameCluster name where DB servers are configured
Master Cluster NameMaster cluster name of Replica
  • Can check when it is Replica detailed information.
Database NameServer name applied when DB was installed
Database UsernameDB user name
Planned ComputeStatus of resources with Planned Compute set
Maintenance WindowDB patch operation period setting status
  • If maintenance window setting is needed, click Modify icon to set
BackupBackup setting status
  • If backup setting is needed, click Modify icon to set
Audit Log SettingsAudit Log setting status
  • If Audit Log setting is needed, click Modify icon to set
TimezoneStandard time zone where Database will be used
DB LocaleLocale to use in DB
Database EncodingCharacter encoding method to use in DB
VIPVirtual IP information
  • Can check only when redundancy is set
NetworkNetwork information where DB is installed (VPC, Subnet, VIP, NAT IP (VIP))
IP Access ControlService access policy settings
  • If IP addition and deletion is needed, click Modify icon to set
Active & StandbyActive/Standby server type, Basic OS, additional Disk information
  • If server type modification is needed, click Modify icon next to server type to set. For server type modification procedure, see Changing Server Type
    • Server restart required when modifying server type
  • If storage expansion is needed, click Modify icon next to storage capacity to expand. For storage expansion procedure, see Expanding Storage
  • If storage addition is needed, click Add Disk button next to additional Disk to add. For storage addition procedure, see Adding Storage
Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Database Detailed Information Items

Replica Information

Replica Information tab is activated only when Replica is configured in cluster. Through Replica Information tab, can check Master cluster name, replica count, Replica’s replication status.

CategoryDetailed Description
Master InformationName of Master cluster
Replica CountNumber of Replicas created in Master cluster
Replica StatusReplica server status created in Master cluster
  • Can check server name, status check, status details, status check time
  • To check Replica status, click Status Check button
    • Cluster maintains Synchronizing status while checking, and cluster changes to Running status when check is complete
Table. Replica Information Tab Detailed Information Items

Tags

On PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, check tag information of selected resource, and add, change, or delete.

CategoryDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can check Key, Value information of tags
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, can check operation history of selected resource.

CategoryDetailed Description
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Check operation date/time, resource ID, resource name, operation details, event topic, operation result, operator information
Table. Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Managing PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Resources

If existing configuration options of created PostgreSQL(DBaaS) resource need to be changed, or recovery, Replica configuration is needed, can perform tasks on PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.

Controlling Operation

If changes occur to running PostgreSQL(DBaaS) resource, can start, stop, restart. Also, if HA is configured, can switch Active-Standby servers through Switch-over.

To control PostgreSQL(DBaaS) operation, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to control operation. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Check PostgreSQL(DBaaS) status and complete change through control buttons below.
    • Start: DB service installed server and DB service run (Running).
    • Stop: DB service installed server and DB service stop (Stopped).
    • Restart: Only DB service restarts.
    • Switch Over: Can change Active server and Standby server of DB.

Synchronizing Service Status

Can synchronize real-time service status of PostgreSQL(DBaaS).

To check PostgreSQL(DBaaS) service status, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to check service status. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Service Status Sync button. Cluster changes to Synchronizing status while checking.
  5. When check is complete, status is updated in server information item, and cluster changes to Running status.

Changing Server Type

Can change configured server type.

Caution
Server restart is required when modifying server type. Please check separately for SW license modification matters or SW settings and reflection according to server specification changes.

To change server type, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to change server type. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Modify icon of server type to change at bottom of detailed information. Server Type Modify popup opens.
  5. Select server type in Server Type Modify popup, then click Confirm button.

Adding Storage

If data storage space of 5 TB or more is needed, can add storage. For DB configured in redundancy, added simultaneously to both redundancy servers.

Caution
  • Applied identically with Storage type selected when creating service.
  • For DB configured in redundancy, when adding storage, applied simultaneously to storage of Active DB and Standby DB.
  • If Replica exists, Master cluster storage cannot be smaller than Replica storage. Expand Replica storage first then expand Master cluster storage.
  • When adding Archive/Temp storage, DB restarts and temporarily unavailable.

To add storage, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to add storage. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Add Disk button at bottom of detailed information. Additional Storage Request popup opens.
  5. In Additional Storage Request popup, enter purpose and capacity, then click Confirm button.

Expanding Storage

Can expand storage added as data area up to maximum 5 TB based on initially allocated capacity. For DB configured in redundancy, expanded simultaneously to both redundancy servers.

To expand storage capacity, follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to change server type. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Modify icon of additional Disk to expand at bottom of detailed information. Additional Storage Modify popup opens.
  5. In Additional Storage Modify popup, enter expansion capacity, then click Confirm button.

Terminating PostgreSQL(DBaaS)

Can reduce operating costs by terminating unused PostgreSQL(DBaaS). However, since terminating service may immediately stop running service, proceed with termination task after fully considering impact of service interruption.

Caution
  • For DB with Replica configured, even if Master DB is terminated, Replica is not deleted together. If Replica also needs to be deleted, terminate separately from resource list.
  • When terminating DB, stored data and if backup is set, all backup data are deleted.

To terminate PostgreSQL(DBaaS), follow these steps:

  1. Click All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the Service Home page for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will be directed to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, select resource to terminate and click Service Termination button.
  4. When termination is complete, check if resource is terminated on PostgreSQL(DBaaS) list page.

2.2.1 - Managing DB Service

Users can manage PostgreSQL(DBaaS) through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Managing Parameters

Provides functionality to easily view and modify database configuration parameters.

Viewing Parameters

Follow these steps to view configuration parameters.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to view and modify parameters. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Parameter Management button. The Parameter Management popup window will open.
  5. In the Parameter Management popup window, click the View button. The View Notification popup window will open.
  6. When the View Notification popup window opens, click the Confirm button. Viewing may take some time.

Modifying Parameters

Follow these steps to modify configuration parameters.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to view and modify parameters. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Parameter Management button. The Parameter Management popup window will open.
  5. In the Parameter Management popup window, click the View button. The View Notification popup window will open.
  6. When the View Notification popup window opens, click the Confirm button. Viewing may take some time.
  7. If modification is needed, click the Modify button and enter the modification in the custom value area of the Parameter to be modified.
  8. When input is complete, click the Complete button.

Managing DB Users

Provides management functionality to view DB user information and change status information.

Viewing DB Users

Follow these steps to view DB users.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to view DB users. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB User Management button. You will move to the DB User Management page.
  5. On the DB User Management page, click the View button. Viewing may take some time.

Changing DB User Status

Follow these steps to change the status of viewed DB users.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to modify DB users. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB User Management button. You will move to the DB User Management page.
  5. On the DB User Management page, click the View button. Viewing may take some time.
  6. If modification is needed, click the Modify button and change the status area value or enter remarks.
  7. When input is complete, click the Complete button.

Managing DB Access Control

Provides IP-based DB user access control management functionality. Users can directly specify IPs that can access the database, allowing access only from permitted IPs.

Notice
Perform DB user viewing before setting DB access control. For DB user viewing, please refer to Managing DB Users.

Viewing DB Access Control

Follow these steps to view DB users with IP access control set.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to manage access control. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Access Control Management button. You will move to the DB Access Control Management page.
  5. On the DB Access Control Management page, click the View button. Viewing may take some time.

Adding DB Access Control

Follow these steps to add IP access control.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to add IP access control. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Access Control Management button. You will move to the DB Access Control Management page.
  5. On the DB Access Control Management page, click the View button. Viewing may take some time.
  6. When viewing is complete, click the Add button. The Add DB Access Control popup window will open.
  7. In the Add DB Access Control popup window, select the DB user name and enter the IP Address.
  8. When input is complete, click the Complete button.

Deleting DB Access Control

Follow these steps to delete IP access control.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to delete IP access control. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Access Control Management button. You will move to the DB Access Control Management page.
  5. On the DB Access Control Management page, click the View button. Viewing may take some time.
  6. When viewing is complete, click the Delete button. The Delete popup window will open.
  7. In the Delete popup window, click the Confirm button.

Managing Archive

Provides functionality to set Archive mode and Archive Log retention period, allowing users to flexibly configure Archive log management policies according to their operating environment. Additionally, provides functionality to manually delete Archive logs, enabling users to organize unnecessary log data and effectively manage system resources.

Notice
When creating a service, the default setting is Archive mode enabled with a retention period of 3 days.

Setting Archive Mode

Follow these steps to set Archive mode.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to set Archive mode. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Archive Settings Management button. You will move to the Archive Settings Management page.
  5. On the Archive Settings Management page, click the View button. Viewing may take some time.
  6. Click the Modify button and select usage and retention period.
  7. When modification is complete, click the Complete button.

Deleting Archive Files

Follow these steps to delete Archive files.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to set Archive mode. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Archive Settings Management button. You will move to the Archive Settings Management page.
  5. On the Archive Settings Management page, click Delete All Archive if you want to delete all Archive files, or click Delete Backed Up Archive if you want to delete only backed up Archive files.

Modifying Audit Settings

You can change the Audit log storage settings for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).

Follow these steps to change the Audit log storage settings for PostgreSQL(DBaaS).

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to view the service status. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Modify icon in Audit Settings at the bottom of the detailed information. The Modify Audit Settings popup window will open.
  5. In the Modify Audit Settings popup window, modify the usage and then click the Confirm button.
    • Selecting Use sets the Audit log function. Setting Audit logs may degrade DB performance.
    • Disabling Use deletes the Audit log storage file. Please back up the Audit log file separately before disabling use.

Exporting DB Log

Supports exporting audit(Audit) log data that requires long-term retention to Object Storage. Users can directly set the log type to be saved, the destination Bucket to export to, and the cycle for exporting logs. Logs are copied and stored to the specified Object Storage according to the set criteria. Additionally, to efficiently manage disk space, provides an option to automatically delete original log files while exporting logs to Object Storage. Using this option allows you to effectively secure storage capacity while safely storing necessary log data for long-term retention.

Notice
  • To use the DB Log Export function, Object Storage creation is required. For Object Storage creation, please refer to the Object Storage User Guide.
  • Please check the expiration date of the authentication key. If the authentication key expires, logs will not be saved to the Bucket.
  • Please be careful not to expose authentication key information externally.

Setting DB Log Export Mode

Follow these steps to set DB Log export mode.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to export DB Log. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Log Export button. You will move to the DB Log Export page.
  5. On the DB Log Export page, click the Register button. You will move to the Register DB Log Export page.
  6. On the Register DB Log Export page, enter the corresponding information and then click the Complete button.
    CategoryRequired
    Detailed Description
    Log TypeRequiredLog type to save
    Storage Bucket NameRequiredObject Storage Bucket name to save
    Authentication Key > Access keyRequiredAccess key to access the Object Storage to save
    Authentication Key > Secret keyRequiredSecret key to access the Object Storage to save
    File Creation CycleRequiredCycle for creating files in Object Storage
    Delete Original LogOptionalWhether to delete original logs while exporting to Object Storage
    Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) DB Log Export Configuration Items

Managing DB Log Export

Follow these steps to modify, cancel, or immediately export DB Log export settings.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to manage DB Log export. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Log Export button. You will move to the DB Log Export page.
  5. On the DB Log Export page, click the More button according to the log type you want to manage and click the Immediate Export, Modify, or Cancel button.
    • Immediate Export: The selected log is exported to the Bucket of the previously set Object Storage.
    • Modify: Modifies the DB Log export mode settings.
    • Cancel: Cancels the DB Log export mode settings.

Upgrading Minor Version

Provides version upgrade functionality for some feature improvements and security patches. Only Minor version upgrades within the same Major version are supported.

Caution
  • Please check the service status first through service status synchronization before performing version upgrade.
  • Please proceed with version upgrade after setting up backup. If backup is not set, some data may not be recoverable when problems occur during update.
  • In DBs with Replica configured, the Master DB version cannot be higher than the Replica version. Please check the Replica version first and perform version upgrade if necessary.
  • Backed up data is automatically deleted after version upgrade is complete.

Follow these steps to upgrade Minor Version.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to upgrade the version. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Modify button in the Image version item. The Version Upgrade popup window will open.
  5. In the Version Upgrade popup window, select the modified version and backup setting, then click the Confirm button.
  6. In the Version Upgrade Notification popup window, click the Confirm button.

Configuring Migration

Provides Migration functionality that replicates in real-time while synchronizing with the operating database, without service interruption, using Replication method.

Notice
For detailed Migration configuration guide, please refer to Architecture Center > Migration Guide.

Follow these steps to configure Migration.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to migrate. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Migration Configuration button. The Migration Configuration popup window will open.
  5. In the Migration Configuration popup window, check the instructions and click the Confirm button. You will move to the Migration Configuration page.
  6. On the Migration Configuration page, enter the corresponding information and then click the Connection Check button.
  7. When connection is complete, click the Complete button.
    CategoryRequired
    Detailed Description
    Source DB Database NameRequiredDatabase name of the Source DB to be migrated
    Source DB IPRequiredIP of the Source DB to be migrated
    Source DB PortRequiredPort of the Source DB to be migrated
    Source DB UsernameRequiredUsername of the Source DB to be migrated
    Source DB PasswordRequiredPassword of the Source DB to be migrated
    Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Migration Configuration Items

Promoting Migration Cluster to Master Cluster

You can promote a configured Migration Cluster to Master Cluster.

Caution
When promoting to Master, synchronization with the Source DB to be migrated is stopped.

Follow these steps to promote Migration Cluster to Master.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to promote to Master. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Master Promotion button. The Master Promotion Notification popup window will open.
  5. In the Master Promotion Notification popup window, click the Confirm button.

Upgrading OS Kernel

You can upgrade the OS Kernel to improve operating database functionality and apply security patches.

Caution
  • Service is interrupted during OS upgrade.
  • Upgrade time may vary depending on the version, and if upgrade fails, it will revert to the previous configuration.
  • Cannot recover to the previous OS after upgrade is complete.

Follow these steps to upgrade OS Kernel.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to upgrade OS Kernel. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the OS(Kernel) Upgrade button. The OS(Kernel) Upgrade Notification popup window will open.
  5. In the OS(Kernel) Upgrade Notification popup window, check the instructions and click the Confirm button.

2.2.2 - DB Backup and Restore

Users can set up PostgreSQL(DBaaS) backup through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and restore using backed up files.

Backing Up PostgreSQL(DBaaS)

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) provides data backup functionality based on its own backup commands. Additionally, through backup history viewing and backup file deletion functionality, it provides a backup environment optimized for data protection and management.

Setting Up Backup

For PostgreSQL(DBaaS) backup setup method, please refer to Creating PostgreSQL(DBaaS).

Follow these steps to modify backup settings for created resources.

Caution
  • For stable backup, it is recommended to add a separate BACKUP storage or sufficiently increase storage capacity. Especially when backup target data exceeds 100 GB and there are many data changes, please secure additional storage corresponding to approximately 60% of data capacity. For adding and increasing storage, please refer to Adding PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Storage, Expanding PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Storage guides.
  • When backup is set, backup is performed at the specified time after the set time, and additional charges occur depending on backup capacity.
  • When backup setting is changed to Not Set, backup execution stops immediately, and stored backup data is deleted and can no longer be used.

Follow these steps to set up backup.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to set backup. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Modify button in the backup item. The Backup Settings popup window will open.
  5. To set backup, click Use in the Backup Settings popup window, select retention period, backup start time, and Archive backup cycle, then click the Confirm button.
    • To stop backup settings, uncheck Use in the Backup Settings popup window and click the Confirm button.

Viewing Backup History

Notice
You can set notifications for backup success and failure through the Notification Manager product. For detailed user guide on notification policy settings, please refer to Creating Notification Policy.

Follow these steps to view backup history.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to view backup history. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup window will open.
  5. In the Backup History popup window, you can check backup status, version, backup start datetime, backup completion datetime, and capacity.

Deleting Backup Files

Caution
Backup files cannot be restored after deletion. Please verify that it is unnecessary data before deletion.

Follow these steps to delete backup history.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to view backup history. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup window will open.
  5. In the Backup History popup window, check the file to delete and then click the Delete button.

Restoring PostgreSQL(DBaaS)

In case of failure or data loss requiring restoration from backup files, you can restore based on a specific point in time through the restore function. When PostgreSQL(DBaaS) restore is performed, a new server is created with the OS image at the initial provisioning time, DB is installed with the version of that backup time, and restoration proceeds with DB configuration information and data.

Caution
To perform restore, at least the same capacity as the data type Disk capacity is required. If Disk capacity is insufficient, restore may fail.

Follow these steps to restore PostgreSQL(DBaaS).

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Resource List page, click the resource to restore. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Database Restore button. You will move to the Database Restore page.
  5. Enter the corresponding information in the Database Restore Configuration area and then click the Complete button.
    Category
    Required
    Detailed Description
    Restore TypeRequiredSetting the point in time user wants to restore
    • Backup Point(Recommended): Restore based on backup file. Select from the list of backup file time points displayed in the list
    • User-Specified Point: Restore to a point user wants within the backupable time range. The recoverable period can restore from the initial backup start time to 1 hour/30 minutes/10 minutes/5 minutes before current time according to Archive backup cycle setting value. Select the date and time to backup
    Server Name PrefixRequiredServer name of restore DB
    • Enter 3~16 characters starting with lowercase English letters, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters(-)
    • Actual server name is created with a postfix like 001, 002 attached based on server name
    Cluster NameRequiredCluster name of restore DB
    • Enter 3 ~ 20 characters using English letters
    • Cluster is a unit that groups multiple servers
    Service Type > Server TypeRequiredServer type where restore DB will be installed
    • Standard: Standard specifications commonly used
    • High Capacity: Large-capacity servers with 24vCore or more
    Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalStatus of resources with Planned Compute set
    • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute set that are currently in use
    • Set: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
    • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by Planned Compute per resource
    Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage settings used by restore DB
    • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
    • DATA: Storage area for table data and archive files, etc.
      • Applied identically with Storage type set in original cluster
      • Enter capacity as a multiple of 8 in the range of 16 ~ 5,120
    • Additional: Storage area for DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup data
      • Applied identically with Storage type set in original cluster
      • Only DATA, TEMP, Archive purposes can be added in restore DB.
      • Select Use and then enter storage purpose and capacity
      • To add storage, click the + button, to delete, click the x button
      • Capacity can be entered as a multiple of 8 in the range of 16 ~ 5,120, and can create up to 9
    Database UsernameRequiredDatabase username set in original DB
    Database Port NumberRequiredDatabase Port number set in original DB
    IP Access ControlOptionalIP address to access restore DB
    • Enter in IP format (example: 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (example: 192.168.10.1/32, 192.168.10.1/32) and click the Add button
    • To delete entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
    Maintenance PeriodOptionalDB maintenance period
    • When Use is selected, set day of week, start time, and duration
    • It is recommended to set a maintenance period for stable DB management. Patching is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
    • If set to Not Used, Samsung SDS is not responsible for problems caused by unapplied patches.
    TagsOptionalAdd tags
    • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
    Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Restore Configuration Items

2.2.3 - Configuring Read Replica

Users can enter required information for Read Replica through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and create the service through detailed options.

Configuring Replica

Through Replica configuration, you can create replica servers for read-only or disaster recovery purposes. You can create up to 5 Replicas per Database.

Notice
To configure Replica for disaster recovery, please create it through Replica Configuration(Other Region).

Follow these steps to configure Replica.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to configure Replica. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Configure Replica button. You will move to the Configure Replica page.
  5. Enter information in the Configure Replica area and then click the Complete button.
    Category
    Required
    Detailed Description
    RegionRequiredRegion to configure Replica
    • Only exposed when Replica Configuration(Other Region) is selected
    Replica CountRequiredNumber of Replicas to configure
    • Can configure up to 5 per cluster
    • When selecting a value of 2 or more, additional input is required for Replica name and service type information
    Replica NameRequiredReplica server name
    • Enter 3 ~ 19 characters starting with lowercase English letters, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters(-)
    • The entered Replica name is displayed as cluster name in the list
    Service Type > Server TypeRequiredReplica server type
    • Standard: Standard specifications commonly used
    • High Capacity: Large-capacity servers with 24vCore or more
    Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalStatus of resources with Planned Compute set
    • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute set that are currently in use
    • Set: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
    • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by Planned Compute per resource
    Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage settings for Replica DB
    • Basic OS: Area used on the server where DB is installed
      • Applied identically according to the Storage type set in the original DB
      • Capacity setting is not possible
    • DATA: Storage area for table data and archive files, etc.
      • Applied identically according to the Storage type set in the original DB
      • Capacity setting is not possible
    • Additional: Storage area for DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup data
      • Applied identically according to the Storage type set in the original DB
      • Only DATA, TEMP purposes can be added in Replica
      • Select Use and then enter the storage purpose and capacity. Enter capacity in the range of 16 ~ 5,120 as a multiple of 8
      • To add storage, click the + button, to delete, click the x button. Can add up to 9.
    IP Access ControlOptionalService access policy setting
    • Sets access policy for IPs entered on the page, so no separate Security Group policy setting is required
    • Enter in IP format (example: 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (example: 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32) and click the Add button
    • To delete entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
    Maintenance PeriodOptionalDB maintenance period
    • When Use is selected, set day of week, start time, and duration
    • It is recommended to set a maintenance period for stable DB management. Patching is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
    • If set to Not Used, Samsung SDS is not responsible for problems caused by unapplied patches.
    TagsOptionalAdd tags
    • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
    Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Replica Configuration Items

Reconfiguring Replica

In case of network failure or Replication delay with Master Cluster, you can replicate Master Cluster data again through the Replica reconfiguration function.

Follow these steps to reconfigure Replica.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to reconfigure Replica. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Reconfigure Replica button. The Reconfigure Replica Notification popup window will open.
  5. In the Reconfigure Replica Notification popup window, click the Confirm button.

Promoting Replica Cluster to Master Cluster

You can promote a configured Replica Cluster to Master Cluster.

Caution
When promoting to Master, synchronization with the existing Master Cluster is stopped.

Follow these steps to promote Replica Cluster to Master.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to promote to Master. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Master Promotion button. The Master Promotion Notification popup window will open.
  5. In the Master Promotion Notification popup window, click the Confirm button.

2.2.4 - Connecting to DB Server

Scenario Overview

The PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Server Connection scenario involves creating a Bastion host(Virtual Server) and Database service, and accessing the DB service through the Bastion host. To stably access PostgreSQL(DBaaS) in the Samsung Cloud Platform environment, you need to create a Bastion host and configure network connections using it. To maintain stable and high security levels, it is recommended to configure the Database service in a Private Subnet environment and the Bastion host in a restricted Public Subnet environment.

This scenario explains the process of creating a Bastion host and Database service, configuring the network environment for Bastion host and Database access, and connecting through a DB connection client.

Architecture
Figure. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Server Connection Architecture

Scenario Components

You can configure this scenario using the following services.

Service Group
Service
Detailed Description
NetworkingVPCService that provides independent virtual networks in cloud environments
NetworkingVPC > SubnetService that subdivides networks according to user needs/scale within VPC
NetworkingVPC > Public IPService that reserves public IPs and assigns/releases them to Compute resources
NetworkingVPC > Internet GatewayService that connects VPC resources to the internet
NetworkingSecurity GroupVirtual firewall that controls server traffic
DatabasePostgreSQL(DBaaS)Service that easily creates and manages EPAS in a web environment
ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
ComputeVirtual Server > KeypairEncrypted file used to connect to Virtual Server
Table. List of Scenario Components
Note
  • The default policy of Security Group is Deny All, so you must register only allowed IPs.
  • The All Open(Any IP, Any Port) policy for In/Outbound can expose cloud resources directly to external threats.
    • Setting policies with specific IPs and Ports can enhance security.

Scenario Configuration Method

Create the necessary services to configure the scenario through the following procedure.

1. Configuring Network

This explains the process of configuring the network environment for accessing Bastion Host and Database service.

1-1. Creating VPC

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will move to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC button. You will move to the Create VPC page.
  3. On the Create VPC page, enter the necessary information for service creation.
    • Enter the IP range as 192.168.x.0/16.
  4. On the Summary panel, check the detailed creation information and estimated billing amount, then click the Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the VPC List page.

1-2. Creating Subnet

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Subnet guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will move to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Subnet menu. You will move to the Subnet List page.
  3. Click the Create Subnet button. You will move to the Create Subnet page.
  4. On the Create Subnet page, enter the necessary information for service creation.
    • Select General as the Subnet type.
    • Select the previously created VPC.
    • Enter the IP range as 192.168.x.0/24.
  5. On the Summary panel, check the detailed creation information and estimated billing amount, then click the Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Subnet List page.

1-3. Creating Internet Gateway

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Internet Gateway guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will move to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. You will move to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. Click the Create Internet Gateway button. You will move to the Create Internet Gateway page.
  4. On the Create Internet Gateway page, enter the required information for service creation.
    • Select the previously created VPC.
    • Select Use for the Firewall usage item.
  5. On the Summary panel, check the detailed creation information and estimated billing amount, then click the Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Internet Gateway List page.

1-4. Creating Public IP

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Public IP guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will move to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Public IP menu. You will move to the Public IP List page.
  3. Click the Reserve Public IP button. You will move to the Reserve Public IP page.
  4. On the Reserve Public IP page, enter the required information for service reservation.
  5. On the Summary panel, check the detailed creation information and estimated billing amount, then click the Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Public IP List page.

1-5. Creating Security Group

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will move to the Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Security Group button. You will move to the Create Security Group page.
  3. On the Create Security Group page, enter the required information for service creation.
  4. Check the entered information and click the Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Security Group List page.

2. Creating Bastion Host

This explains the process of configuring the Bastion Host where the DB connection client should be installed.

2-1. Creating Server Keypair

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides > Keypair guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. You will move to the Virtual Server’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Keypair menu. You will move to the Keypair List page.
  3. Click the Create Keypair button. You will move to the Create Keypair page.
  4. On the Create Keypair page, enter the required information for service creation.
  5. Check the creation information and click the Complete button.
    • Key download is only possible on the first attempt, and re-issuance is not provided.
    • Please store the downloaded key in a safe place.

2-2. Creating Bastion Host

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. You will move to the Virtual Server’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Virtual Server button. You will move to the Create Virtual Server page.
  3. On the Create Virtual Server page, enter the required information for service creation.
  4. On the Summary panel, check the detailed creation information and estimated billing amount, then click the Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Virtual Server List page.

2-3. Checking Bastion Host Connection ID and Password

  1. Click the All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. You will move to the Virtual Server’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. You will move to the Virtual Server List page.
  3. On the Virtual Server List page, click the resource created in 2-2. Creating Bastion Host. You will move to the detailed information page of that resource.
  4. On the detailed information page, click the RDP password lookup button in the Keypair name item. The RDP password lookup popup window will open.
  5. In the RDP password lookup popup window, attach the keypair file downloaded in 2-1. Creating Server Keypair.
  6. After attaching, click the Password check button. The ID and Password for accessing that resource will be displayed.

3. Creating Database

This explains the process of creating the Database service.

3-1. Creating PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Service

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Database > PostgreSQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the PostgreSQL(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create PostgreSQL(DBaaS) button. You will move to the Create PostgreSQL(DBaaS) page.
  3. On the Create PostgreSQL(DBaaS) page, enter the required information for service creation.
    • Select and connect the previously created VPC and Subnet.
    • Enter Database-related creation information in the required information input screen.
    • Add the Bastion host IP in the IP access control item.
    • The Database Port defaults to 2866, but users can specify it.
  4. On the Summary panel, check the detailed creation information and estimated billing amount, then click the Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the PostgreSQL(DBaaS) List page.

4. Setting Rules

This explains the process of setting rules for users to access the Bastion host and for the Bastion host to access the Database.

4-1. Adding Security Group Security Rules

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will move to the Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will move to the Security Group List page.
  3. Select the Security Group resource created in [1-5. Creating Security Group]. You will move to the detailed information page of that resource.
  4. On the detailed information page, click the Rules tab. You will move to the Rules tab.
  5. On the Rules tab, click the Add Rule button. You will move to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. In the Add Rule popup window, enter the following rules and click the Confirm button.
    DirectionRemoteDestination AddressProtocolPortDescription
    InboundCIDRUser PC IPTCP3389 (RDP)Bastion connection PC → Bastion host
    OutboundCIDRDB IPTCPDatabase Port (Direct Input)Bastion host → Database
    Table. Security Group Security Rules to be Added

4-2. Adding IGW Firewall Rules

For detailed creation method, please refer to the Networking > Firewall > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will move to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. You will move to the Firewall List page.
  3. On the Firewall List page, select the Internet Gateway resource name created in 1-3. Creating Internet Gateway. You will move to the detailed information page of that resource.
  4. On the detailed information page, click the Rules tab. You will move to the Rules tab.
  5. On the Rules tab, click the Add Rule button. You will move to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. In the Add Rule popup window, enter the following rules and click the Confirm button.
    Source AddressDestination AddressProtocolPortActionDirectionDescription
    Bastion connection PC IPBastion host IPTCP3389(RDP)AllowInboundUser PC → Bastion host
    Table. Internet Gateway Firewall Rules to be Added

5. Connecting to Database

This explains the process of connecting to the Database through a DB connection client program.

This guide explains how to connect using pgAdmin. There are various Database client programs and CLI utilities, so users can install and use the appropriate tool.

5-1. Connecting to Bastion Host

  1. Run Remote Desktop Connection in the Windows environment of the PC that wants to connect to the Bastion host, enter the NAT IP of the Bastion Host, and click the Connect button.
  2. When Remote Desktop Connection succeeds, the User credential input window will open. Enter the ID and Password confirmed in 2-3. Checking Bastion Host Connection ID and Password and click the Confirm button.

5-2. Installing DB Connection Client Program (pgAdmin) on Bastion Host

  1. Go to the pgAdmin official page and download the pgAdmin program.
  2. Connect the user PC’s hard drive to upload the file to the Bastion host.
  3. On the Local Resources tab of Remote Desktop Connection, click the More button in the local devices and resources item.
  4. Select the local disk of the location where the file was downloaded and click the Confirm button.
  5. Copy the downloaded file to upload it to the Bastion Host, then click the pgAdmin installation file to install it.

5-3. Connecting to Database Using DB Connection Client Program (pgAdmin)

  1. Run pgAdmin and click the Add New Server button.
  2. In the Register - Server popup window, enter the Database server information created in 3-1. Creating PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Service in the General tab and Connection tab, then click the Save button.
    Screen(Tab)Required Input ItemInput Value
    GeneralNameUser-defined (ex. service name)
    ConnectionHost name/addressDatabase server IP
    ConnectionPortDatabase Port
    ConnectionMaintenance databaseDatabase name
    ConnectionPasswordDatabase password
    Table. DB Connection Client Program Input Items
  3. Click the database name created in pgAdmin to perform the connection.
    • After connection, you can perform simple queries, etc.

2.2.5 - Using Extensions

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Extension usage

Note
The list of extensions included in each version of PostgreSQL can be found on the PostgreSQL official page.

The list of extensions that can be installed in the current database can be checked with the following SQL statement.

SQL> select * from pg_available_extensions;

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) has the following additional installation items outside of the default extension by version:

Extension namedescription
pgauditprovides detailed audit logging functionality at the session and object level
pg_crona scheduler that allows job scheduling with cron syntax within the database
pg_hint_planProvides a feature to apply hint clauses to SQL execution plans
pgvectorVector data type and similarity search, etc. AI vector operation function provided
postgisGIS (Geographic Information System) provides spatial object storage and spatial query functionality
Table. PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Extension Additional Installation Items

In addition to the above items, if additional Extension installation is required, please refer to Support Center > Inquiry and inquire.

  • Once the inquiry is received, we will proceed with the installation after review. Please note that some Extensions may not work normally during Replica configuration and recovery.

2.3 - API Reference

API Reference

2.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

2.5 - Release Note

PostgreSQL(DBaaS)

2026.03.19
FEATURE Added OS(Kernel) Upgrade Function
  • Enhances latest security patches and stability through OS(Kernel) upgrade function.
2025.12.16
FEATURE Added Disaster Recovery Replica Configuration Function
  • Can configure disaster recovery replicas through Replica configuration (Other Region) function.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Added User (Access Control) Management, Archive Setting Function, DB Audit Log Export Function, Backup Notification Function, Migration Function
2025.02.27
FEATURE Added New Version, Server Type, Per-Server IP Setting, Block Storage Capacity Expansion Function
  • PostgreSQL(DBaaS) feature changes
    • PostgreSQL new versions added: 13.16, 14.13, 15.8
    • 2nd generation server type added
      • Added 2nd generation (dbh2) server type based on Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Processor. For details, see PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Server Type
    • Block Storage capacity expansion is possible after service creation.
    • Per-server network IP setting function added allowing common settings or per-server settings depending on usage purpose.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform common feature changes
    • Reflected common CX changes such as Account, IAM and Service Home, tags.
2024.10.01
NEW PostgreSQL(DBaaS) Service Official Version Release
  • Volume encrypted storage selection option added to Block Storage type.
  • Role Switch (Active ↔ Standby) function added for Active DB and Standby DB configured in redundancy.
  • DB instance performance and log monitoring possible through integration with cloud monitoring service.
  • Planned Compute policy setting possible according to server type selected by customer.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta Version Release
  • PostgreSQL(DBaaS) service that allows easy creation and management of PostgreSQL in web environment has been released.

3 - MariaDB(DBaaS)

3.1 - Overview

Service Overview

MariaDB(DBaaS) is an open source relational database (RDBMS) with high compatibility with MySQL. Samsung Cloud Platform provides an environment where MariaDB installation is automated through a web-based Console and management functions for operation can be performed.

MariaDB(DBaaS) is designed with a high availability architecture considering storage-based data replication and minimizing Failover time. To prevent data loss, when the content of the Active server is changed, it is synchronously replicated to the Standby server, and up to 5 read-only servers called Replicas for read load distribution and disaster recovery (DR) are provided. In addition, to prepare for problems with the DB server or data, it provides a function to automatically backup at a time specified by the user, so that data can be recovered at a desired point in time.

Architecture
Figure. MariaDB(DBaaS) Architecture

Provided Features

MariaDB(DBaaS) provides the following features.

  • Auto Provisioning: Database (DB) installation and settings are possible through UI, and provides Active-standby redundancy configuration based on storage replication. When Active server fails, automatic Failover to Standby occurs.
  • Operation Control Management: Provides function to control running server status. In addition to start and stop, restart is possible when there is a problem with the DB or to reflect settings. When high availability (HA) is configured, the user can directly perform node switching of Active-Standby through Switch-over.
  • Backup and Recovery: Provides data backup function based on own backup command. Backup time period and retention period can be set by the user, and additional fees are charged depending on backup capacity. Also provides recovery function for backed up data, and when the user performs recovery, a separate DB is created and recovery proceeds to the point selected by the user (backup storage point, user-specified point). When recovering to a user-specified point, the recovery point can be set up to 5 minutes/10 minutes/30 minutes/1 hour ago based on stored backup files and archive files.
  • Version Management: Provides version upgrade (Minor) function for some function improvements and security patches. Whether to perform backup according to version upgrade can be selected by the user, and if performing backup, data is backed up before patch execution and then DB engine update is performed.
  • Replica Configuration: Up to 5 Read Replicas can be configured in the same/different region for read load distribution and disaster recovery (DR).
  • Audit Setting: Provides Audit setting function to monitor user DB access and DDL (Data Definition Language)/DML (Data Manipulation Language) execution results.
  • Parameter Management: DB configuration parameter modification for performance improvement and security is possible.
  • Service Status Inquiry: Inquires the final status of current DB service.
  • Monitoring: CPU, Memory, performance monitoring information can be checked through Cloud Monitoring and Servicewatch.
  • DB User Management: Manages by inquiring DB account (user) information registered in DB.
  • DB Access Control Management: Allows registration and termination of access allowed IP based on DB accounts registered in DB.
  • Archive Management: Archive file retention period (1 day~35 days) setting and Archive mode (On/Off) setting are possible in DB server.
  • DB Log Export: Logs stored through Audit settings can be exported to user’s Object Storage.
  • Migration: Supports migration using Replication method by synchronizing data in real time with operating database without service interruption.
  • OS Kernel Upgrade: OS Kernel can be upgraded for some function improvements and security patch application.

Components

MariaDB(DBaaS) provides engine versions pre-verified according to open source support policy and various server types. Users can select and use them according to the service scale they want to configure.

Engine Version

The engine versions supported by MariaDB(DBaaS) are as follows.

Technical support can be used until the EoTS (End of Technical Service) date of the supplier, and the EOS date when new creation stops is set to 6 months before the EoTS date.

According to supplier policy, EOS and EoTS dates may change, so please check the supplier’s license management policy page for details.

ServiceProvided VersionEOS Date(Samsung Cloud Platform New Creation Stop Date)EoTS Date(Community Technical Support End Date)
MariaDB (Community)10.6.52026-03-192026-07-06
10.6.92026-03-192026-07-06
10.6.102026-03-192026-07-06
10.6.122026-03-192026-07-06
10.6.142026-03-192026-07-06
10.6.152026-03-192026-07-06
10.6.162026-03-192026-07-06
10.6.172026-03-192026-07-06
10.6.192026-03-192026-07-06
10.6.222026-03-192026-07-06
10.11.82027-09 (Scheduled)2028-02-16
10.11.92027-09 (Scheduled)2028-02-16
10.11.132027-09 (Scheduled)2028-02-16
11.42028-12 (Scheduled)2029-05-29
Table. Engine Versions Provided by MariaDB(DBaaS)

Server Type

The server types supported by MariaDB(DBaaS) are as follows.

For more information on server types provided by MariaDB(DBaaS), see MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Type.

Standard db1v2m4
ClassificationExampleDetailed Description
Server TypeStandardProvided server types
  • Standard: Standard specification (vCPU, Memory) configuration commonly used
  • High Capacity: Large capacity server specification with 24 vCore or more
Server Specificationdb1Provided server specifications
  • db1: Standard specification (vCPU, Memory) configuration commonly used
  • dbh2: Large capacity server specification
    • Provides servers with 24 vCore or more
Server Specificationv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server Specificationm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Type Components

Prerequisite Services

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating this service. Please prepare in advance by referring to the guide provided for each service.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an independent virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Prerequisite Services

3.1.1 - Server Type

MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Type

MariaDB(DBaaS) provides server types with various combinations of CPU, Memory, and Network Bandwidth. When creating a MariaDB(DBaaS), the database engine is installed according to the selected server type, which is chosen based on the intended use.

The server types supported by MariaDB(DBaaS) are as follows:

Standard db1v2m4
Classification
ExampleDetailed Description
Server TypeStandardClassification of provided server types
  • Standard: Standard specification (vCPU, Memory) composition
  • High Capacity: High-capacity server specification above Standard
Server Specificationdb1Classification of provided server types and generation
  • db1: General specification, 1 represents the generation
  • dbh2: h represents high-capacity server specification, 2 represents the generation
Server Specificationv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server Specificationm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Type Format

db1 Server Type

The db1 server type of MariaDB(DBaaS) is provided with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various database workloads.

  • Up to 3.3Ghz Intel 3rd generation (Ice Lake) Xeon Gold 6342 Processor
  • Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory
  • Up to 12.5 Gbps networking speed
ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
Standarddb1v1m21 vCore2 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m322 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m126 vCore12 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m246 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m486 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m168 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m328 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m648 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m968 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m1288 vCore128 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m2010 vCore20 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m4010 vCore40 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m8010 vCore80 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m12010 vCore120 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m2412 vCore24 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m4812 vCore48 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m9612 vCore96 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m14412 vCore144 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m19212 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m2814 vCore28 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m5614 vCore56 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m11214 vCore112 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m16814 vCore168 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m3216 vCore32 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m6416 vCore64 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m12816 vCore128 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m19216 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m25616 vCore256 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Type Specifications - db1 Server Type

dbh2 Server Type

The dbh2 server type of MariaDB(DBaaS) is provided with high-capacity server specifications and is suitable for large-scale data processing database workloads.

  • Up to 3.2GHz Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Xeon Gold 6448H Processor
  • Supports up to 128 vCPUs and 1,536 GB of memory
  • Up to 25Gbps networking speed
ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
High Capacitydbh2v24m4824 vCore48 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m9624 vCore96 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m19224 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m28824 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m6432 vCore64 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m12832 vCore128 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m25632 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m38432 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m19248 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m57648 vCore576 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m25664 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m76864 vCore768 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m28872 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m86472 vCore864 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m38496 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m115296 vCore1152 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m512128 vCore512 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m1536128 vCore1536 GBUp to 25 Gbps
Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Type Specifications - dbh2 Server Type

3.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

MariaDB(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

The following table shows the performance monitoring metrics of MariaDB(DBaaS) that can be checked through Cloud Monitoring. For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

For server monitoring metrics of MariaDB(DBaaS), refer to the Virtual Server monitoring metrics guide.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnit
Active LocksNumber of Active Lockscnt
Active SessionsNumber of Active Sessionscnt
Connection Usage [Total]DB connection session usage rate%
ConnectionsNumber of connectionscnt
Connections [MAX]Maximum number of connected threadscnt
Binary Log Used [MB]Binary log usageMB
Data Directory Used [MB]Data directory usageMB
Open FilesNumber of open DB filescnt
Open Files [MAX]Maximum number of openable DB filescnt
Open Files UsageDB file maximum usage rate%
Relay Log Used [MB]Relay log usageMB
Instance Status [PID]mariadbd processpid
Safe PIDmariadbd_safe processpid
Slave Behind Master secondsTime difference between Master and Slave data (only executed on slave)sec
Tablespace UsedTablespace usageMB
Tablespace Used [Total]Total Tablespace usageMB
Running ThreadsNumber of running threadscnt
SlowqueriesNumber of sessions that execute SQL for more than 10 secondscnt
Slowqueries [Total]Total number of sessions that execute SQL for more than 10 secondscnt
Transaction Time [Long]Longest transaction execution timesec
Wait LocksNumber of sessions blocked by lock for more than 60 secondscnt
Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

3.1.3 - ServiceWatch Metrics

MariaDB sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at a 1-minute interval.

Reference
How to check metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Indicators

The following are the basic metrics for the MariaDB namespace.

OS Basic Metrics

CategoryPerformance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnitMeaningful Statistics
CPUCPU UsageCPU UsagePercent
DiskDisk UsageDisk Usage RatePercent
DiskDisk Write BytesWrite capacity on block device (bytes/second)Bytes/Second
DiskDisk Read BytesAmount read from block device (bytes/second)Bytes/Second
DiskDisk Write RequestNumber of write requests on block device (requests/second)Count/Second
DiskDisk Read RequestsNumber of read requests on block device (requests/second)Count/Second
DiskAverage Disk I/O Queue SizeAverage queue length of requests issued to the block deviceNone
DiskDisk I/O UtilizationBlock device’s actual time spent processing I/O operationsPercent
MemoryMemory UsageMemory Usage RatePercent
NetworkNetwork In BytesReceived capacity on the network interface (bytes/second)Bytes/Second
NetworkNetwork Out BytesTransmitted capacity from network interface (bytes/second)Bytes/Second
NetworkTCP ConnectionsTotal number of TCP connections currently established correctlyCount/Second
NetworkNetwork In PacketsNumber of packets received on the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork Out PacketsNumber of packets transmitted from the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork In DroppedNumber of packet drops received on the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork Out DroppedNumber of packet drops transmitted from the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork In ErrorsNumber of packet errors received on the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork Out ErrorsNumber of packet errors transmitted from the network interfaceCount
Table. OS Basic Metrics

MariaDB Basic Metrics

CategoryPerformance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnitMeaningful Statistics
ActivelockActive locksNumber of active locksCount
ActivesessionActive sessionsNumber of active sessionsCount
ActivesessionConnection usageDB connection session usage ratePercent
ActivesessionConnectionsDB connection sessionCount
ActivesessionConnections(MAX)Maximum number of connections that can be attached to the DBCount
DatafileBinary log usedbinary log usage (MB)Megabytes
DatafileOpen filesNumber of DB files in open stateCount
DatafileOpen files(MAX)Number of DB files that can be openedCount
DatafileOpen files usageDB file maximum count usage ratePercent
DatafileRelay log usedRelay log usage (MB)Megabytes
InnoDBInnoDB buffer pool hit ratioPercent
InnoDBInnoDB row lock waitsNumber of InnoDB transactions currently waiting for a lock (Lock-wait)Count
InnoDBInnoDB row lock timeTotal time waited due to InnoDB row lock (in milliseconds)Count
InnoDBInnoDB deadlocksNumber of transactions rolled back due to deadlock occurrence (cumulative)Count
InnoDBInnoDB table locks waitsNumber of times waiting occurred to acquire table lock (cumulative)Count
StateInstance stateMariaDB Process status up/down checkCount
StateSlave behind master seconds (Replica Only)Replica delay (unit: seconds)Seconds
StateReplica Thread running (Replica Only)
StateReplica io thread running (Replica Only)
StateReplica SQL thread running (Replica Only)
TablespaceTablespace usedTablespace usageMegabytes
TablespaceTablespace used (TOTAL)Tablespace usage (total)Megabytes
TransactionsSlow queriesNumber of slow queriesCount
TransactionsTransaction timeLong Transaction timeSeconds
TransactionsWait locksNumber of sessions waiting for lockCount
TransactionsSQL Queries/SecTotal number (cumulative) of all queries (statements) received from clients since the server startedCount
Table. MariaDB Basic Metrics

3.2 - How-to guides

Users can create MariaDB(DBaaS) by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating MariaDB(DBaaS)

You can create and use MariaDB(DBaaS) service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Notice
  • Before creating a service, configure the VPC Subnet type as General.
    • If the Subnet type is Local, the Database service cannot be created.
  • When loading large capacity data of 2 TB or more, backup may be performed for a long time or the performance of the DB itself may deteriorate. To prevent this, from an operational perspective, it is necessary to consider cleaning up unnecessary data or migrating old data to a statistical collection environment.

To create MariaDB(DBaaS), follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of MariaDB(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create MariaDB(DBaaS) button. It moves to the Create MariaDB(DBaaS) page.
  3. On the Create MariaDB(DBaaS) page, enter the information required for service creation and select detailed options.
    • Select the required information in the Image and Version Selection area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Image VersionRequiredProvides version list of MariaDB(DBaaS)
      Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Image and Version Selection Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Entry area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Server Name PrefixRequiredServer name where DB will be installed
      • Start with lowercase English letters, enter 3 to 13 characters using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
      • Actual server name is created with a postfix like 001, 002 based on the server name
      Cluster NameRequiredCluster name where DB servers are configured
      • Enter 3 to 20 characters using English
      • Cluster is a unit that bundles multiple servers
      Service Type > Server TypeRequiredServer type where DB will be installed
      • Standard: Standard specification commonly used
      • High Capacity: Large capacity server with 24 vCore or more
      Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalResource status with Planned Compute set
      • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute set that are in use
      • Settings: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
      • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by resource-based Planned Compute
      • Create Planned Compute Service: Move to Planned Compute service application page
      Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage setting used by DB according to purpose
      • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
      • DATA: Storage area for table data and archive files, etc.
        • Select storage type then enter capacity. (For more information by Block Storage type, see Creating Block Storage)
          • SSD: High-performance general volume
          • HDD: General volume
          • SSD_KMS, HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management System) encryption key
        • Set Storage type is applied equally to additional storage
        • Enter capacity in multiples of 8 within the range of 16 to 5,120
        • Since service interruption may occur due to large Sort such as SQL execution or monthly batch, separate TEMP storage must be allocated and used
      • Additional: DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup data storage area
        • Select Use then enter Purpose and Capacity of storage
        • Storage type is applied equally to the type set in DATA, and capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 within the range of 16 to 5,120
        • To add storage, click the + button, and to delete, click the x button. Can add up to 9
        • Before transferring backup data, temporarily store backup data in BACKUP storage
          • If backup data exceeds 100 GB and data changes are frequent, it is recommended to add separate BACKUP storage for stable backup. It is recommended to set backup capacity to about 60% of DATA capacity
          • If BACKUP storage is not added, /tmp area is used, and backup fails if capacity is insufficient
        • Only one Block Storage is allocated per service for Archive, TEMP, BACKUP storage
      Redundancy ConfigurationOptionalRedundancy configuration
      • If using redundancy configuration, DB instances are configured as Active DB and Standby DB
      Network > Common SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in the service are installed
      • Select if you want to apply the same settings to all installed servers
      • Select pre-created VPC and Subnet, IP, Public NAT
        • Only automatic IP generation is possible
        • Public NAT function is only available when VPC is connected to Internet Gateway. If you check Use, you can select from IPs reserved in Public IP of VPC product. For more information, see Creating Public IP
      Network > Per Server SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in the service are installed
      • Select if you want to apply different settings for each installed server
      • Select pre-created VPC and Subnet, IP, Public NAT
        • Enter IP for each server
        • Public NAT function is only available when VPC is connected to Internet Gateway. If you check Use, you can select from IPs reserved in Public IP of VPC product. For more information, see Creating Public IP
      IP Access ControlOptionalService access policy setting
      • Since access policy is set for the IP entered on the page, you don’t need to set Security Group policy separately
      • Enter in IP format (example: 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (example: 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32) and click the Add button
      • To delete the entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
      Maintenance PeriodOptionalDB maintenance period
      • If selecting Use, set day of week, start time, and duration
      • It is recommended to set the maintenance period for stable DB management. Patch work is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
      • If set to not used, Samsung SDS is not responsible for problems caused by not applying patches.
      Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Service Information Entry Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Database Configuration Required Information Entry area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Database NameRequiredServer name applied when DB is installed
      • Start with English, enter 3 to 20 characters using English and numbers
      Database UsernameRequiredDB user name
      • Account with that name is also created in OS
      • Enter 2 to 20 characters using lowercase English letters
      • Limited Database usernames can be checked in Console
      Database PasswordRequiredPassword to use when accessing DB
      • Enter 8 to 30 characters including English letters, numbers, and special characters (excluding " )
      Database Password ConfirmationRequiredRe-enter password to use when accessing DB identically
      Database Port NumberRequiredPort number required for DB connection
      • Enter DB port within the range of 1200 to 65535
      Backup > UseOptionalBackup usage
      • Select Use to set backup file retention period, backup start time, and Archive backup cycle
      Backup > Retention PeriodOptionalBackup retention period
      • Select backup retention period. File retention period can be set from 7 days to 35 days
      • Separate fees are charged for backup files depending on capacity
      Backup > Backup Start PeriodOptionalBackup start time
      • Select backup start time
      • The minutes when backup is performed are set randomly, and backup end time cannot be set
      Backup > Archive Backup CycleOptionalArchive backup cycle
      • Select Archive backup cycle
      • 1 hour is recommended for Archive backup cycle. When selecting 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, it may affect DB performance
      Audit Log SettingOptionalAudit Log storage
      • Select Use to set Audit Log function
        • User access information recording is stored
          • Users can specify event types to Audit through server_audit_events parameter, and can modify through Parameter screen
        • DB performance may deteriorate when Audit is set
      ServiceWatch Log CollectionOptionalServiceWatch log collection
      • Select Use to set ServiceWatch log collection function
      • Provided free up to 5 GB for all services in Account, and fees are charged depending on storage capacity when exceeding 5 GB
      • When collecting, log group and log stream are automatically created, and cannot be deleted until resource is deleted
      • To prevent exceeding 5 GB, directly deleting log data or shortening retention period is recommended
      ParameterRequiredParameters to use for DB
      • Click the View button to check detailed information of parameters
      • After DB creation is complete, parameter modification is possible, and DB must be restarted after modification
      DB Character SetRequiredCharacter encoding method to use for DB
      • As a character set used when storing text data, DB is created with default setting to selected Encoding
      Time ZoneRequiredStandard time zone where Database will be used
      Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Database Configuration Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Entry area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Can add up to 50 per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Additional Information Entry Items
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.

Checking MariaDB(DBaaS) Detailed Information

MariaDB(DBaaS) service allows you to check and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The MariaDB(DBaaS) Details page consists of Detailed Information, Tags, Operation History tabs, and for DBs with Replica configured, Replica Information tab is additionally configured.

To check the detailed information of MariaDB(DBaaS) service, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of MariaDB(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to check detailed information. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Details page.
    • At the top of the MariaDB(DBaaS) Details page, status information and additional function information are displayed.
      ClassificationDetailed Description
      Cluster StatusCluster status where DB is installed
      • Creating: Cluster is being created
      • Editing: Cluster is changing to Operation execution state
      • Error: State where error occurred while cluster is performing operation
        • If it occurs continuously, contact administrator
      • Failed: State where cluster failed during creation process
      • Restarting: State where cluster is being restarted
      • Running: State where cluster is operating normally
      • Starting: State where cluster is starting
      • Stopped: State where cluster is stopped
      • Stopping: State where cluster is in stop state
      • Synchronizing: State where cluster is synchronizing
      • Terminating: State where cluster is being deleted
      • Unknown: State where cluster status is unknown
        • If it occurs continuously, contact administrator
      • Upgrading: State where cluster is changing to upgrade execution state
      Cluster ControlButtons to change cluster status
      • Start: Start stopped cluster
      • Stop: Stop running cluster
      • Restart: Restart running cluster
      • Switch-Over: Switch Standby cluster to Active
      More Additional FunctionsCluster-related management buttons
      • Sync Service Status: Check real-time DB service status
      • Backup History: If backup is set, check backup normal execution status and history
      • Database Recovery: Recover DB based on specific point in time
      • Parameter Management: Check and modify DB configuration parameters
      • Replica Configuration: Configure Replica which is read-only cluster
      • Replica Configuration (Other-Region): Configure disaster recovery replica in different region, button is disabled if no region configured in that Account
      • DB User Management: Check and manage DB account (user) information registered in DB
      • DB Access Control Management: Allows registration and termination of access allowed IP based on DB accounts registered in DB
      • Archive Setting Management: Archive file retention period setting and Archive mode setting are possible
      • DB Log Export: Logs stored through Audit settings can be exported to user’s Object Storage
      • Migration Configuration: Provides Migration function of Replication method
      • OS(Kernel) Upgrade: OS Kernel version upgrade
      Service TerminationButton to terminate service
      Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Status Information and Additional Functions

Detailed Information

On the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify information if necessary.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Server InformationServer information configured in the cluster
  • Category: Server type (Active, Standby, Replica)
  • Server Name: Server name
  • IP:Port: Server IP and port
  • Status: Server status
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • For DB service, means cluster SRN
Resource NameResource name
  • For DB service, means cluster name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation DateDate and time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modification DateDate and time when the service information was modified
Image VersionInstalled DB image and version information
  • If version upgrade is needed, click the Edit icon to set
Cluster TypeCluster type (Master Cluster, Replica Cluster, Migration Cluster)
Cluster NameCluster name where DB servers are configured
Master Cluster NameMaster cluster name of Replica
  • Available when it is detailed information of Replica
Database NameServer name applied when DB is installed
Database UsernameDB user name
Planned ComputeResource status with Planned Compute set
Maintenance PeriodDB maintenance period status
  • If maintenance period setting is needed, click the Edit icon to set
BackupBackup setting status
  • If backup setting is needed, click the Edit icon to set
Audit Log SettingAudit Log setting status
  • If Audit Log setting is needed, click the Edit icon to set
ServiceWatch Log CollectionServiceWatch log collection setting status
  • If log collection setting is needed, click the Edit icon next to log collection to set
DB Character SetCharacter encoding method to use for DB
Time ZoneStandard time zone where Database will be used
VIPVirtual IP information
  • Only available when high availability is set
NetworkNetwork information where DB is installed (VPC, Subnet, VIP, NAT IP(VIP))
IP Access ControlService access policy setting
  • If IP addition and deletion are needed, click the Edit icon to set
Active & StandbyActive/Standby server type, Basic OS, Additional Disk information
  • If server type modification is needed, click the Edit icon next to server type to set. For server type modification procedure, see Changing Server Type
    • If server type is modified, server restart is needed
  • If storage expansion is needed, click the Edit icon next to storage capacity to expand. For storage expansion procedure, see Expanding Storage
  • If storage addition is needed, click the Disk Add button next to additional Disk to add. For storage addition procedure, see Adding Storage
Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Database Detailed Information Items

Replica Information

The Replica Information tab is activated only when Replica is configured in the cluster. Through the Replica Information tab, you can check Master cluster name, replica count, and Replica status.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Master InformationName of Master cluster
Replica CountNumber of Replicas created in Master cluster
Replica StatusReplica server status created in Master cluster
  • Can check about server name, status inquiry, status details, status check time
  • To inquire Replica status, click the Status Inquiry button
    • While inquiring, cluster maintains Synchronizing status, and when inquiry is complete, cluster changes to Running status
Table. Replica Information Tab Detailed Information Items

Tags

On the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource and add, change, or delete it.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can check Key, Value information of tags
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from existing Key and Value lists
Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Tag Tab Items

Operation History

You can check the operation history of the selected resource on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Check operation date, resource ID, resource name, operation details, event topic, operation result, operator information
Table. Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Managing MariaDB(DBaaS) Resources

If you need to change existing configuration options of created MariaDB(DBaaS) resources or perform recovery, Replica configuration, you can perform operations on the MariaDB(DBaaS) Details page.

Controlling Operation

If changes occur in running MariaDB(DBaaS) resources, you can start, stop, or restart. Also, if configured with HA, you can switch Active-Standby servers through Switch-over.

To control MariaDB(DBaaS) operation, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of MariaDB(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to control operation. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Check MariaDB(DBaaS) status and complete changes through the control buttons below.
    • Start: DB service installed server and DB service will run (Running).
    • Stop: DB service installed server and DB service will stop (Stopped).
    • Restart: Only DB service will restart.
    • Switch Over: Can switch Active server and Standby server of DB.

Syncing Service Status

You can sync the real-time service status of MariaDB(DBaaS).

To check MariaDB(DBaaS) service status, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of MariaDB(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to check service status. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Sync Service Status button. While retrieving, the cluster changes to Synchronizing status.
  5. When retrieval is complete, the status is updated in the server information item, and the cluster changes to Running status.

Changing Server Type

You can change the configured server type.

Caution
If you modify the server type, server restart is needed. Please check SW license modification matters or SW settings and application due to server specification change separately.

To change the server type, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of MariaDB(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to change server type. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of the server type you want to change at the bottom of detailed information. The Edit Server Type popup window opens.
  5. In the Edit Server Type popup window, select the server type and click the OK button.

Adding Storage

If data storage space of 5TB or more is needed, you can add storage. For DB configured with redundancy, both redundancy servers are added simultaneously.

Caution
  • It is applied equally to the Storage type selected when creating the service.
  • For DB configured with redundancy, when adding storage, it is applied simultaneously to storage of Active DB and Standby DB.
  • When Replica exists, storage of Master cluster cannot be smaller than storage of Replica. Expand Replica storage first then expand Master cluster storage.
  • When adding Archive/Temp storage, DB restarts and is temporarily unavailable.

To add storage, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of MariaDB(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to add storage. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Disk Add button at the bottom of detailed information. The Additional Storage Request popup window opens.
  5. In the Additional Storage Request popup window, after entering purpose and capacity, click the OK button.

Expanding Storage

Storage added as data area can be expanded up to maximum 5 TB based on the initially allocated capacity. For DB configured with redundancy, both redundancy servers are expanded simultaneously.

To expand storage capacity, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of MariaDB(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to change server type. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of the additional Disk you want to expand at the bottom of detailed information. The Edit Additional Storage popup window opens.
  5. In the Edit Additional Storage popup window, after entering expansion capacity, click the OK button.

Terminating MariaDB(DBaaS)

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused MariaDB(DBaaS). However, if you terminate the service, the running service may stop immediately, so you should proceed with termination after fully considering the impact caused by service interruption.

Caution
  • For DB configured with Replica, even if Master DB is terminated, Replica is not deleted together. If you also want to delete Replica, terminate separately from the resource list.
  • If you terminate DB, stored data and backup data are all deleted even if backup was set.

To terminate MariaDB(DBaaS), follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of MariaDB(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page, select the resource to terminate and click the Terminate Service button.
  4. When termination is complete, check if the resource is terminated on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.

3.2.1 - Managing DB Service

Users can manage MariaDB(DBaaS) through Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Managing Parameter

Provides functionality to easily view and modify database configuration parameters.

Viewing Parameters

Follow these steps to view configuration parameters.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view or modify parameters on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click Parameter Management button. Parameter Management popup window will open.
  5. Click View button in the Parameter Management popup window. View Notification popup window will open.
  6. Click Confirm button when the View Notification popup window opens. It will take some time to view.

Modifying Parameters

Follow these steps to modify configuration parameters.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view or modify parameters on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click Parameter Management button. Parameter Management popup window will open.
  5. Click View button in the Parameter Management popup window. View Notification popup window will open.
  6. Click Confirm button when the View Notification popup window opens. It will take some time to view.
  7. If modification is needed, click Modify button and enter the modification in the custom value area of the Parameter to be modified.
  8. When input is complete, click Complete button.
Note

If you change the character_set_server value, first check the collation that matches the character set with the following command:

SQL> SHOW COLLATION WHERE Charset = 'character set name';

Set the parameter values character-set-server, collation-server, and init_connect with the confirmed collation.

ItemDescriptionRestart Required
character-set-serverSpecify default character setRestart required
collation-serverSpecify default collationRestart required
init_connectSQL statement executed when Client connects to databaseRestart not required
Table. Parameter Setting Items

Managing DB Users

Provides management functionality to view DB user information and change status information.

Viewing DB Users

Follow these steps to view DB users.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view DB users on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click DB User Management button. You will be taken to the DB User Management page.
  5. Click View button on the DB User Management page. It will take some time to view.

Changing DB User Status

Follow these steps to change the status of viewed DB users.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to modify DB users on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click DB User Management button. You will be taken to the DB User Management page.
  5. Click View button on the DB User Management page. It will take some time to view.
  6. If modification is needed, click Modify button and change the status area value or enter note content.
  7. When input is complete, click Complete button.

Managing DB Access Control

Provides IP-based DB user access control management functionality. Users can directly specify IPs that can access the database, setting it so that only allowed IPs can access.

Notice
Before setting DB access control, perform DB user view. For DB user view, please refer to Managing DB Users.

Viewing DB Access Control

Follow these steps to view DB users with IP access control set.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to manage access control on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click DB Access Control Management button. You will be taken to the DB Access Control Management page.
  5. Click View button on the DB Access Control Management page. It will take some time to view.

Adding DB Access Control

Follow these steps to add IP access control.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to add IP access control on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click DB Access Control Management button. You will be taken to the DB Access Control Management page.
  5. Click View button on the DB Access Control Management page. It will take some time to view.
  6. When viewing is complete, click Add button. DB Access Control Add popup window will open.
  7. Enter DB username selection and IP Address in the DB Access Control Add popup window.
  8. When input is complete, click Complete button.

Deleting DB Access Control

Follow these steps to delete IP access control.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to delete IP access control on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click DB Access Control Management button. You will be taken to the DB Access Control Management page.
  5. Click View button on the DB Access Control Management page. It will take some time to view.
  6. When viewing is complete, click Delete button. Delete popup window will open.
  7. Click Confirm button in the Delete popup window.

Managing Archive

Provides Archive mode setting and Archive Log retention period setting functionality, allowing users to flexibly set Archive log management policies according to their operating environment. Additionally, it provides functionality to manually delete Archive logs, enabling effective management of system resources by cleaning up unnecessary log data.

Notice
When creating a service, the default setting is Archive mode enabled and retention period is 3 days.

Setting Archive Mode

Follow these steps to set Archive mode.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to set Archive mode on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click Archive Setting Management button. You will be taken to the Archive Setting Management page.
  5. Click View button on the Archive Setting Management page. It will take some time to view.
  6. Click Modify button and select usage and retention period.
  7. When modification is complete, click Complete button.

Deleting Archive Files

Follow these steps to delete Archive files.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to set Archive mode on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click Archive Setting Management button. You will be taken to the Archive Setting Management page.
  5. To delete all Archive files on the Archive Setting Management page, click Delete All Archives, and to delete only backed up Archive files, click Delete Backed Up Archives button.

Modifying Audit Settings

You can change MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Audit log storage settings.

Follow these steps to change MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Audit log storage settings.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view service status on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Modify icon in Audit Settings at the bottom of the detail information. Audit Settings Modify popup window will open.
  5. Modify usage in the Audit Settings Modify popup window and click Confirm button.
    • When Use is selected, Audit log functionality is set. When Audit log is set, DB performance may degrade.
    • When Use is disabled, the Audit log storage file is deleted. Back up the Audit log file separately before disabling use.

Exporting DB Log

Supports exporting audit (Audit) logs that require long-term preservation to Object Storage. Users can directly set the log type to be stored, the target Bucket to export to, and the cycle for exporting logs. Logs are copied and stored to the specified Object Storage according to the set criteria. Additionally, for efficient management of disk space, it also provides an option to automatically delete the original log file while exporting the log to Object Storage. By using this option, you can effectively secure storage capacity while safely storing necessary log data for the long term.

Notice
  • To use the DB Log Export functionality, Object Storage creation is required. For Object Storage creation, please refer to Object Storage User Guide.
  • Please be sure to check the expiration date of the authentication key. If the authentication key expires, logs will not be stored in the Bucket.
  • Please be careful not to expose authentication key information to the outside.

Setting DB Log Export Mode

Follow these steps to set DB Log Export mode.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to export DB Log on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click DB Log Export button. You will be taken to the DB Log Export page.
  5. Click Register button on the DB Log Export page. You will be taken to the DB Log Export Register page.
  6. Enter the corresponding information on the DB Log Export Register page and click Complete button.
    CategoryRequired
    Description
    Log TypeRequiredLog type to store
    Storage Bucket NameRequiredObject Storage Bucket name to store
    Authentication Key > Access keyRequiredAccess key to access the Object Storage to store
    Authentication Key > Secret keyRequiredSecret key to access the Object Storage to store
    File Creation CycleRequiredCycle for creating files in Object Storage
    Original Log DeletionOptionalWhether to delete the original log while exporting to Object Storage
    Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) DB Log Export Configuration Items

Managing DB Log Export

Follow these steps to modify, cancel, or immediately export DB Log Export settings.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to manage DB Log Export on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click DB Log Export button. You will be taken to the DB Log Export page.
  5. On the DB Log Export page, click More button according to the log type you want to manage and click Immediate Export, Modify, or Cancel button.
    • Immediate Export: Selected logs are exported to the previously set Object Storage’s Bucket.
    • Modify: Modifies DB Log Export mode settings.
    • Cancel: Cancels DB Log Export mode settings.

Upgrading Minor Version

Provides version upgrade functionality according to some feature improvements and security patches. Only Minor version upgrade functionality within the same Major version is supported.

Warning
  • Please check the service status first through service status synchronization, then perform version upgrade.
  • Please set backup before proceeding with version upgrade. If backup is not set, some data may not be recoverable if a problem occurs during upgrade.
  • In a DB where Replica is configured, the Master DB version cannot be higher than the Replica version. First check the Replica version and perform version upgrade if necessary.
  • Backed up data is automatically deleted after version upgrade is complete.

Follow these steps to upgrade Minor Version.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to upgrade version on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Modify icon in the Image Version item. Version Upgrade popup window will open.
  5. Select the modification version and backup setting in the Version Upgrade popup window, then click Confirm button.
  6. Click Confirm button in the Version Upgrade Notification popup window.

Configuring Migration

Provides Migration functionality that replicates in real-time with a running database using Replication method without service interruption.

Notice
For detailed Migration configuration guide, please refer to Architecture Center > Migration Guide.

Follow these steps to configure Migration.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to migrate on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click Migration Configuration button. Migration Configuration popup window will open.
  5. Confirm the guidelines in the Migration Configuration popup window and click Confirm button. You will be taken to the Migration Configuration page.
  6. Enter the corresponding information on the Migration Configuration page and click Connection Check button.
  7. When connection is complete, click Complete button.
    CategoryRequired
    Description
    Source DB Database NameRequiredDatabase name of the Source DB to be migrated
    Source DB IPRequiredIP of the Source DB to be migrated
    Source DB PortRequiredPort of the Source DB to be migrated
    Source DB UsernameRequiredUsername of the Source DB to be migrated
    Source DB PasswordRequiredPassword of the Source DB to be migrated
    Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Migration Configuration Items

Promoting Migration Cluster to Master Cluster

You can promote a configured Migration Cluster to Master Cluster.

Warning
When promoting to Master, synchronization with the Source DB to be migrated is stopped.

Follow these steps to promote Migration Cluster to Master.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to promote to Master on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click Master Promotion button. Master Promotion Notification popup window will open.
  5. Click Confirm button in the Master Promotion Notification popup window.

Upgrading OS Kernel

You can upgrade the OS Kernel to improve running database functionality and apply security patches.

Warning
  • Service is interrupted while OS upgrade is in progress.
  • Upgrade time may vary depending on the version, and if upgrade fails, it will revert to the previous configuration.
  • Cannot recover to the previous OS after upgrade is complete.

Follow these steps to upgrade OS Kernel.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to upgrade OS Kernel on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click OS(Kernel) Upgrade button. OS(Kernel) Upgrade Notification popup window will open.
  5. Confirm the guidelines in the OS(Kernel) Upgrade Notification popup window and click Confirm button.

3.2.2 - DB Backup and Restore

Users can set up MariaDB(DBaaS) backup and restore using backed up files through Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Backing up MariaDB(DBaaS)

MariaDB(DBaaS) provides data backup functionality based on its own backup command. Additionally, it provides an optimized backup environment for data protection and management through backup history verification and backup file deletion functionality.

Setting up Backup

For MariaDB(DBaaS) backup configuration method, please refer to Creating MariaDB(DBaaS).

Follow these steps to modify the backup settings of the created resource.

Warning
  • For stable backup, it is recommended to add a separate BACKUP storage or sufficiently increase storage capacity. Especially if backup target data exceeds 100 GB and there is a lot of data change, please secure additional storage corresponding to approximately 60% of the data capacity. For storage addition and capacity increase methods, please refer to Adding MariaDB(DBaaS) Storage, Expanding MariaDB(DBaaS) Storage guides.
  • If backup is set, backup is performed at the specified time after the set time, and additional charges occur according to backup capacity.
  • If backup setting is changed to Not Set, backup execution is immediately stopped and stored backup data is deleted and can no longer be used.
  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to set up backup on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Modify button in the backup item. Backup Setting popup window will open.
  5. To set up backup, click Use in the Backup Setting popup window, select retention period, backup start time, Archive backup cycle, and click Confirm button.
    • To stop backup setting, uncheck Use in the Backup Setting popup window and click Confirm button.

Viewing Backup History

Notice
To set notifications for backup success and failure, you can set through Notification Manager product. For detailed user guide on notification policy setting, please refer to Creating Notification Policy.

Follow these steps to view backup history.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view backup history on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Backup History button. Backup History popup window will open.
  5. In the Backup History popup window, you can view backup status, version, backup start date/time, backup completion date/time, and capacity.

Deleting Backup Files

Follow these steps to delete backup files.

Warning
Backup files cannot be restored after deletion. Please be sure to confirm that it is unnecessary data before deletion.
  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to view backup history on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Backup History button. Backup History popup window will open.
  5. Check the file you want to delete in the Backup History popup window and click Delete button.

Restoring MariaDB(DBaaS)

In case of failure or data loss, you can restore based on a specific point in time using the restore functionality. When MariaDB(DBaaS) restore is performed, a new server is created with the OS image at the time of initial provisioning, DB is installed with the version of that backup point, and restore is performed with the DB’s configuration information and data.

Warning
At least twice the capacity of the data type Disk is required to perform restore. If Disk capacity is insufficient, restore may fail.

Follow these steps to restore MariaDB(DBaaS).

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to restore on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Database Restore button. You will be taken to the Database Restore page.
  5. Enter information in the Database restore configuration area and click Complete button.
    Category
    Required
    Description
    Restore TypeRequiredSet the point in time the user wants to restore
    • Backup Point (Recommended): Restore based on backup file. Select from the list of backup file points displayed
    • User-Specified Point: Restore to the point in time the user wants within the range where backup is possible. The restorable period depends on the Archive backup cycle setting value, and can restore from the initial backup start point to 1 hour/30 minutes/10 minutes/5 minutes before the current time. Select the date and time to backup
    Server Name PrefixRequiredServer name of restore DB
    • Enter 3-16 characters starting with English lowercase letters, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
    • Actual server name is created with postfix like 001, 002 based on server name
    Cluster NameRequiredCluster name of restore DB
    • Enter 3-20 characters using English
    • Cluster is a unit that groups multiple servers
    Service Type > Server TypeRequiredServer type where restore DB will be installed
    • Standard: Standard specifications commonly used
    • High Capacity: Large capacity server with 24vCore or more (to be provided later)
    Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalResource status with Planned Compute set
    • In Use: Number of resources in use among those with Planned Compute set
    • Set: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
    • Coverage Preview: Amount applied with Planned Compute per resource
    Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage settings used by restore DB
    • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
    • DATA: Storage area for table data, archive files, etc.
      • Applied identically with the Storage type set in the original cluster
      • Capacity is entered in multiples of 8 within the 16-5,120 range
    • Additional: DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup data storage area
      • Applied identically with the Storage type set in the original cluster
      • In restore DB, only DATA, TEMP, Archive purposes can be added
      • Select Use and enter storage purpose and capacity
      • To add storage, click + button, to delete, click x button
      • Capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 within the 16-5,120 range, and can create up to 9
    Database UsernameRequiredDatabase username set in the original DB
    Database Port NumberRequiredDatabase Port number set in the original DB
    IP Access ControlOptionalIP address to access restore DB
    • Enter in IP format (example: 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (example: 192.168.10.1/32, 192.168.10.1/32) and click Add button
    • To delete entered IP, click x button next to the entered IP
    Maintenance WindowOptionalDB maintenance window
    • If Use is selected, set day of week, start time, duration
    • For stable DB management, set maintenance window is recommended. Patching is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
    • If set to Not Used, problems caused by not applying patching are not the responsibility of Samsung SDS.
    TagOptionalAdd tag
    • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
    Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Restore Configuration Items

3.2.3 - Configuring Read Replica

Users can enter required information for Read Replica through Samsung Cloud Platform Console and create the service through detailed options.

Configuring Replica

Through Replica configuration, you can create replica servers for read-only or disaster recovery purposes. You can create up to 5 Replicas per Database.

Notice
To configure a Replica for disaster recovery, please create it through Replica Configuration (Other Region).

Follow these steps to configure Replica.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to configure Replica on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Replica Configuration button. You will be taken to the Replica Configuration page.
  5. Enter information in the Replica configuration area and click Complete button.
    Category
    Required
    Description
    RegionRequiredRegion to configure Replica
    • Only exposed when Replica Configuration (Other Region) is selected
    Replica CountRequiredNumber of Replicas to configure
    • Can configure up to 5 per cluster
    • If selecting a value of 2 or more, additionally enter Replica name and service type information
    Replica NameRequiredReplica server name
    • Enter 3-19 characters starting with English lowercase letters, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
    • The entered Replica name is exposed as cluster name in the list
    Service Type > Server TypeRequiredReplica server type
    • Standard: Standard specifications commonly used
    • High Capacity: Large capacity server with 24vCore or more (to be provided later)
    Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalResource status with Planned Compute set
    • In Use: Number of resources in use among those with Planned Compute set
    • Set: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
    • Coverage Preview: Amount applied with Planned Compute per resource
    Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage settings used by Replica DB
    • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
    • DATA: Storage area for table data, archive files, etc.
      • Applied identically with the Storage type set in the original cluster
      • Capacity setting not possible
    • Additional: DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup data storage area
      • Applied identically with the Storage type set in the original cluster
      • In Replica, only DATA, TEMP purposes can be added
      • Select Use and enter storage purpose and capacity
      • To add storage, click + button, to delete, click x button
      • Capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 within the 16-5,120 range, and can create up to 9 including the number set in the original cluster
    IP Access ControlOptionalService access policy setting
    • Since access policy is set for IPs entered on the page, separate Security Group policy setting is not required
    • Enter in IP format (example: 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (example: 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32) and click Add button
    • To delete entered IP, click x button next to the entered IP
    Maintenance WindowOptionalDB maintenance window
    • If Use is selected, set day of week, start time, duration
    • For stable DB management, set maintenance window is recommended. Patching is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
    • If set to Not Used, problems caused by not applying patching are not the responsibility of the company.
    TagOptionalAdd tag
    • Click Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value values
    Table. MariaDB(DBaaS) Replica Configuration Items

Reconfiguring Replica

In case of network failure or Replication delay with Master Cluster, you can replicate Master Cluster’s data again through Replica reconfiguration functionality.

Follow these steps to reconfigure Replica.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to reconfigure Replica on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click Replica Reconfiguration button. Replica Reconfiguration Notification popup window will open.
  5. Click Confirm button in the Replica Reconfiguration Notification popup window.

Promoting Replica Cluster to Master Cluster

You can promote a configured Replica Cluster to Master Cluster.

Warning
When promoting to Master, synchronization with the existing Master Cluster is stopped.

Follow these steps to promote Replica Cluster to Master.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource for which you want to promote to Master on the MariaDB(DBaaS) List page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click More button and click Master Promotion button. Master Promotion Notification popup window will open.
  5. Click Confirm button in the Master Promotion Notification popup window.

3.2.4 - MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Connection

Scenario Overview

The MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Connection scenario involves creating a Bastion host (Virtual Server) and Database service, and accessing the DB service through the Bastion host. To securely connect to MariaDB(DBaaS) in the Samsung Cloud Platform environment, you need to create a Bastion host and configure network connections through it. We recommend configuring the Database service in a Private Subnet environment and the Bastion host in a restricted Public Subnet environment to maintain stability and high security levels.

This scenario explains the process of creating a Bastion host and Database service, configuring the network environment for Bastion host and Database access, and connecting through a DB access client.

Architecture
Figure. MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Connection Architecture

Scenario Components

You can configure this scenario using the following services:

Service Group
Service
Description
NetworkingVPCService that provides an independent virtual network in the cloud environment
NetworkingVPC > SubnetService that subdivides the network according to user’s purpose/scale within VPC
NetworkingVPC > Public IPService that reserves a public IP to assign to and release from Compute resources
NetworkingVPC > Internet GatewayService that connects VPC resources to the internet
NetworkingSecurity GroupVirtual firewall that controls server traffic
DatabaseMariaDB(DBaaS)Service that allows easy creation and management of MariaDB in a web environment
ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
ComputeVirtual Server > KeypairEncrypted file used to connect to Virtual Server
Table. Scenario Component List
Note
  • The default policy of Security Group is Deny All, so you must register only allowed IPs.
  • The All Open (Any IP, Any Port) policy for In/Outbound can expose cloud resources to external threats.
    • Setting policies by specifying necessary IPs and Ports can enhance security.

Scenario Configuration Method

Create the services required to configure the scenario through the following procedure.

1. Configure Network

This section explains the process of configuring the network environment for Bastion Host and Database service access.

1-1. Create VPC

For detailed creation methods, refer to Networking > VPC > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be taken to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click VPC Create button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the VPC Create page.
  3. Enter the information required for service creation on the VPC Create page.
    • Enter the IP range as 192.168.x.0/16.
  4. Review the detailed information and estimated billing amount on the Summary panel, and click Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the VPC List page.

1-2. Create Subnet

For detailed creation methods, refer to Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Subnet guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be taken to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click Subnet menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Subnet List page.
  3. Click Subnet Create button. You will be taken to the Subnet Create page.
  4. Enter the information required for service creation on the Subnet Create page.
    • Select Subnet type as General.
    • Select the previously created VPC.
    • Enter the IP range as 192.168.x.0/24.
  5. Review the detailed information and estimated billing amount on the Summary panel, and click Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Subnet List page.

1-3. Create Internet Gateway

For detailed creation methods, refer to Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Internet Gateway guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be taken to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click Internet Gateway menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Internet Gateway List page.
  3. Click Internet Gateway Create button. You will be taken to the Internet Gateway Create page.
  4. Enter the required information for service creation on the Internet Gateway Create page.
    • Select the previously created VPC.
    • Select Use for Firewall usage item.
  5. Review the detailed information and estimated billing amount on the Summary panel, and click Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Internet Gateway List page.

1-4. Create Public IP

For detailed creation methods, refer to Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Public IP guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be taken to the VPC’s Service Home page.
  2. Click Public IP menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Public IP List page.
  3. Click Public IP Reserve button. You will be taken to the Public IP Reserve page.
  4. Enter the required information for service reservation on the Public IP Reserve page.
  5. Review the detailed information and estimated billing amount on the Summary panel, and click Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Public IP List page.

1-5. Create Security Group

For detailed creation methods, refer to Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be taken to Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. Click Security Group Create button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Security Group Create page.
  3. Enter the required information for service creation on the Security Group Create page.
  4. Review the entered information and click Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Security Group List page.

2. Create Bastion Host

This section explains the process of configuring a Bastion Host where a DB access client should be installed.

2-1. Create Server Keypair

For detailed creation methods, refer to Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides > Keypair guide.
  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. You will be taken to Virtual Server’s Service Home page.
  2. Click Keypair menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Keypair List page.
  3. Click Keypair Create button. You will be taken to the Keypair Create page.
  4. Enter the required information for service creation on the Keypair Create page.
  5. Review the creation information and click Complete button.
    • Key download is available only for the first time, and reissuance is not provided.
    • Please save the downloaded key in a safe place.

2-2. Create Bastion Host

For detailed creation methods, refer to Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. You will be taken to Virtual Server’s Service Home page.
  2. Click Virtual Server Create button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Virtual Server Create page.
  3. Enter the required information for service creation on the Virtual Server Create page.
  4. Review the detailed information and estimated billing amount on the Summary panel, and click Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Virtual Server List page.

2-3. Verify Bastion Host Access ID and PW

  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. You will be taken to Virtual Server’s Service Home page.
  2. Click Virtual Server menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Virtual Server List page.
  3. Click the resource created in 2-2. Create Bastion Host on the Virtual Server List page. You will be taken to the resource’s detail information page.
  4. Click RDP password query button in the Keypair name item on the detail information page. RDP password query popup window will open.
  5. Attach the keypair file downloaded in 2-1. Create Server Keypair in the RDP password query popup window.
  6. After attaching, click Password Check button. The ID and Password for accessing the resource will be displayed.

3. Create Database

This section explains the process of creating a Database service.

3-1. Create MariaDB(DBaaS) Service

For detailed creation methods, refer to Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Database > MariaDB(DBaaS) menu. You will be taken to MariaDB(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. Click MariaDB(DBaaS) Create button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the MariaDB(DBaaS) Create page.
  3. Enter the required information for service creation on the MariaDB(DBaaS) Create page.
    • Select and connect the previously created VPC and Subnet.
    • Enter Database-related creation information on the required information input screen.
    • Add Bastion host IP in IP access control item.
    • Database Port defaults to 2866, but users can specify it.
  4. Review the detailed information and estimated billing amount on the Summary panel, and click Complete button.
    • When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the MariaDB(DBaaS) list page.

4. Configure Rules

This section explains the process of setting rules for users to access the Bastion host and rules for the Bastion host to access the Database.

4-1. Add Security Group Security Rules

For detailed creation methods, refer to Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. You will be taken to Security Group’s Service Home page.
  2. Click Security Group menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Security Group List page.
  3. Select the Security Group resource created in 1-5. Create Security Group. You will be taken to the resource’s detail information page.
  4. Click Rules tab on the detail information page. You will be taken to the Rules tab.
  5. Click Add Rule button on the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. Enter the following rules in the Add Rule popup window and click Confirm button.
    DirectionRemoteDestination AddressProtocolPortDescription
    InboundCIDRUser PC IPTCP3389 (RDP)Bastion Access PC → Bastion host
    OutboundCIDRDB IPTCPDatabase Port (Direct Input)Bastion host → Database
    Table. Security Group Security Rules to Add

4-2. Add IGW Firewall Rules

For detailed creation methods, refer to Networking > Firewall > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be taken to Firewall’s Service Home page.
  2. Click Firewall menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
  3. Select the Internet Gateway Resource Name created in 1-3. Create Internet Gateway on the Firewall List page. You will be taken to the resource’s detail information page.
  4. Click Rules tab on the detail information page. You will be taken to the Rules tab.
  5. Click Add Rule button on the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. Enter the following rules in the Add Rule popup window and click Confirm button.
    Source AddressDestination AddressProtocolPortActionDirectionDescription
    Bastion Access PC IPBastion host IPTCP3389(RDP)AllowInboundUser PC → Bastion host
    Table. Internet Gateway Firewall Rules to Add

5. Access Database

This section explains the process of users accessing Database through a DB access client program.

This guide explains how to connect using MySQL Workbench. Since various Database client programs and CLI utilities are available, users can install and use the tool that suits them best.

5-1. Access Bastion Host

  1. Run Remote Desktop Connection in the Windows environment of the PC from which you want to access the Bastion host, enter the Bastion Host’s NAT IP, and click Connect button.
  2. When Remote Desktop Connection is successful, User Credential Input Window will open. Enter the ID and Password verified in 2-3. Verify Bastion Host Access ID and PW and click Confirm button.

5-2. Install DB Access Client Program (MySQL Workbench) Inside Bastion Host

  1. Go to the MySQL official page and download the MySQL Workbench program.
  2. Connect your PC’s hard drive to upload the file to the Bastion host.
  3. Click Details button in the local devices and resources item on the Local Resources tab of Remote Desktop Connection.
  4. Select the local disk of the location where the file was downloaded and click Confirm button.
  5. Copy the downloaded file and upload it to the Bastion Host, then click the MySQL Workbench installation file to install it.

5-3. Access Database Using DB Access Client Program (MySQL Workbench)

  1. Run MySQL Workbench and click Database > Manage connections. Manage Server Connection popup window will appear.
  2. Click New button at the bottom left of the Manage Server Connection popup window, enter the Database server information created in 3-1. Create MariaDB(DBaaS) Service, and click Test Connection button. Password popup window will appear.
    Required Input ItemInput Value
    Connection NameUser specified (ex. Service Name)
    Host nameDatabase Server IP
    PortDatabase Port
    UsernameDatabase Username
    Table.DB Access Client Program Input Items
  3. Enter the password set in 3-1. Create MariaDB(DBaaS) Service in the Password popup window and click OK button. When success is complete, click OK button in the Manage Server Connection popup window.
  4. Click Database > Connect to Database. Connect to Database popup window will appear.
  5. Select the Connection Name registered in Stored Connection to perform Database access. After connection, you can perform simple queries, etc.

3.3 - API Reference

API Reference

3.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

3.5 - Release Note

MariaDB(DBaaS)

2026.03.19
FEATURE Disaster Recovery Replica Configuration, OS(Kernel) Upgrade Feature Added, Servicewatch Integration Feature Provided
  • You can configure disaster recovery replicas through the Replica configuration (Other Region) feature.
  • Enhance latest security patches and stability through the OS(Kernel) upgrade feature.
  • You can monitor metrics and logs through integration with Servicewatch.
2025.07.01
FEATURE User (Access Control) Management, Archive Setting Feature, DB Audit Log Export Feature Added, Backup Notification Feature Provided, Migration Feature Added
  • MariaDB(DBaaS) feature added
    • 2nd Generation Server Type added
      • Added 2nd generation (db2) server type based on Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Processor. For more information, see MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Type
    • DB User and Access Control Management and Archive Setting Feature added
    • DB Audit Log Export feature added
    • Backup notification feature provided
    • Migration feature added
      • Provides non-disruptive data migration feature based on Replication. For more information, see Configuring Migration
    • Added HDD, HDD_KMS types to Block Storage type
2025.02.27
FEATURE Server Type Added and Per Server IP Setting, Block Storage Capacity Expansion Feature Added
  • MariaDB(DBaaS) feature changes
    • Added 2nd generation server type
      • Added 2nd generation (dbh2) server type based on Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Processor. For more information, see MariaDB(DBaaS) Server Type
    • After service creation, Block Storage capacity expansion is possible.
    • Per server network IP setting feature added allows common settings or per server settings according to usage purpose.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform common feature changes
    • Reflected common CX changes such as Account, IAM and Service Home, Tags, etc.
2024.10.01
NEW MariaDB(DBaaS) Service Official Version Released
  • Added volume encrypted storage selection option to Block Storage type.
  • Added function to Switch Role (Active ↔ Standby) of Active DB and Standby DB configured in redundancy.
  • Integrated with Cloud Monitoring Service to enable DB instance performance and log monitoring.
  • Planned Compute policy setting is available according to the server type selected by the customer.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta Version Released
  • Released MariaDB(DBaaS) service that allows easy creation and management of MariaDB in a web environment.

4 - MySQL(DBaaS)

4.1 - Overview

Service Overview

MySQL(DBaaS) is an open source relational database management system (RDBMS). Samsung Cloud Platform provides an environment where MySQL installation is automated through a web-based Console and management functions for operation can be performed.

MySQL(DBaaS) is designed with a high availability architecture that considers storage-based data replication and minimization of failover time. To prevent data loss, when content in the Active server is changed, it is synchronously replicated to the Standby server, and up to 5 read-only servers called Replicas are provided for read load distribution and disaster recovery (DR). Additionally, to prepare for problems with the DB server or data, it provides automatic backup at a user-specified time, enabling data recovery at a desired point in time.

Architecture
Figure. MySQL(DBaaS) Architecture

Provided Features

MySQL(DBaaS) provides the following features.

  • Auto Provisioning: Database (DB) installation and configuration is possible through UI, and Active-standby redundancy configuration based on storage replication is provided. When the Active server fails, it automatically fails over to Standby.
  • Operation Control Management: Provides functionality to control the status of running servers. In addition to start and stop, restart is possible when there is an issue with the DB or to reflect configuration values. When configured with high availability (HA), users can directly switch between Active-Standby nodes through Switch-over.
  • Backup and Recovery: Provides data backup functionality based on its own backup commands. Backup time and retention period can be set by the user, and additional charges occur according to backup capacity. Additionally, it provides recovery functionality for backed-up data, and when the user performs recovery, a separate DB is created and recovery proceeds to the point in time selected by the user (backup storage point, user-specified point). When recovering to a user-specified point, the recovery point can be set up to 5 minutes/10 minutes/30 minutes/1 hour ago based on stored backup files and archive files.
  • Version Management: Provides version upgrade (Minor) functionality for some feature improvements and security patches. Users can select whether to perform backup according to version upgrade, and if backup is performed, the data is backed up before patching and then the DB engine is updated.
  • Replica Configuration: Up to 5 Read Replicas can be configured in the same/different region for read load distribution and disaster recovery (DR).
  • Parameter Management: DB configuration parameters for performance improvement and security can be modified.
  • Service Status Check: Checks the final status of the current DB service.
  • Monitoring: CPU, memory, and performance monitoring information can be checked through Cloud Monitoring and Servicewatch.
  • DB User Management: Manages by checking DB account (user) information registered in the DB.
  • DB Access Control Management: Access allowed IP registration and cancellation based on DB accounts registered in the DB is possible.
  • Archive Management: Archive file retention period (1 day ~ 35 days) in the DB server and Archive mode (On/Off) can be set.
  • DB Log Export: Logs stored through Audit settings can be exported to the user’s Object Storage.
  • Migration: Supports migration using Replication method by synchronizing data in real-time with the operating database without service interruption.
  • OS Kernel Upgrade: OS Kernel can be upgraded for some feature improvements and security patch application.

Components

MySQL(DBaaS) provides pre-verified engine versions and various server types according to the open source support policy. Users can select and use them according to the scale of the service they want to configure.

Engine Version

The engine versions supported by MySQL(DBaaS) are as follows.

Technical support can be used until the supplier’s EoTS (End of Technical Service) date, and the EOS date when new creation stops is set to 6 months before the EoTS date.

According to the supplier’s policy, EOS and EoTS dates may change, so please refer to the supplier’s license management policy page for details.

ServiceProvided VersionEOS Date(Samsung Cloud Platform New Creation Stop Date)EoTS Date(Community Technical Support End Date)
MySQL (Community)8.0.282026-03-192026-04-30
8.0.302026-03-192026-04-30
8.0.322026-03-192026-04-30
8.0.332026-03-192026-04-30
8.0.342026-03-192026-04-30
8.0.352026-03-192026-04-30
8.0.362026-03-192026-04-30
8.0.372026-03-192026-04-30
8.0.412026-03-192026-04-30
8.0.422026-03-192026-04-30
8.4.52031-12 (Scheduled)2032-04-30
Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Provided Engine Versions

Server Type

The server type supported by MySQL(DBaaS) is in the following format.

For details on the server types provided by MySQL(DBaaS), refer to MySQL(DBaaS) Server Types.

Standard db1v2m4
ClassificationExampleDetailed Description
Server TypeStandardProvided server types
  • Standard: Standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) generally used
  • High Capacity: Large capacity server specifications with 24 vCore or more
Server Specificationdb1Provided server specifications
  • db1: Standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) generally used
  • dbH2: Large capacity server specifications
    • Provides servers with 24 vCore or more
Server Specificationv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server Specificationm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Server Type Components

Prerequisite Services

This is a list of services that must be configured in advance before creating this service. Please prepare in advance by referring to the guide provided for each service.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCService that provides an independent virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Prerequisite Services

4.1.1 - Server Type

MySQL(DBaaS) Server Type

MySQL(DBaaS) provides server types with various combinations of CPU, Memory, and Network Bandwidth. When creating a MySQL(DBaaS), the database engine is installed according to the selected server type, which is chosen based on the intended use.

The server types supported by MySQL(DBaaS) are as follows:

Standard db1v2m4
Classification
ExampleDetailed Description
Server TypeStandardClassification of provided server types
  • Standard: Composed of standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) for general use
  • High Capacity: Composed of high-capacity server specifications above Standard
Server Specificationdb1Classification of provided server types and generations
  • db1: Represents standard specifications, and 1 represents the generation
  • dbh2: h represents high-capacity server specifications, and 2 represents the generation
Server Specificationv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server Specificationm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Server Type Format

db1 Server Type

The db1 server type of MySQL(DBaaS) is provided with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various database workloads.

  • Up to 3.3Ghz Intel 3rd generation (Ice Lake) Xeon Gold 6342 Processor
  • Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory
  • Up to 12.5 Gbps networking speed
ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
Standarddb1v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m322 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m126 vCore12 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m246 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m486 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m168 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m328 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m648 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m968 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m1288 vCore128 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m2010 vCore20 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m4010 vCore40 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m8010 vCore80 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m12010 vCore120 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m2412 vCore24 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m4812 vCore48 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m9612 vCore96 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m14412 vCore144 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m19212 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m2814 vCore28 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m5614 vCore56 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m11214 vCore112 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m16814 vCore168 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m3216 vCore32 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m6416 vCore64 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m12816 vCore128 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m19216 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m25616 vCore256 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Server Type Specifications - db1 Server Type

dbh2 Server Type

The dbh2 server type of MySQL(DBaaS) is provided with high-capacity server specifications and is suitable for large-scale data processing database workloads.

  • Up to 3.2GHz Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Xeon Gold 6448H Processor
  • Supports up to 128 vCPUs and 1,536 GB of memory
  • Up to 25Gbps networking speed
ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
High Capacitydbh2v24m4824 vCore48 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m9624 vCore96 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m19224 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m28824 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m6432 vCore64 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m12832 vCore128 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m25632 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m38432 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m19248 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m57648 vCore576 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m25664 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m76864 vCore768 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m28872 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m86472 vCore864 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m38496 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m115296 vCore1152 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m512128 vCore512 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m1536128 vCore1536 GBUp to 25 Gbps
Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Server Type Specifications - dbh2 Server Type

4.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

MySQL(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

The table below shows the performance monitoring metrics of MySQL (DBaaS) that can be viewed through Cloud Monitoring. For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

MySQL(DBaaS)’s server monitoring metrics, please refer to the Virtual Server Monitoring Metrics guide.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnit
Active LocksActive Locks countcnt
Active SessionsActive Session countcnt
Binary Log Used [MB]binary log usageMB
Connection Usage [Total]DB connection session usage rate%
ConnectionsConnection countcnt
Connections [MAX]Connection countcnt
Connectionsmax connected threads countcnt
Data Directory Used [MB]data directory usageMB
Instance Status [PID]mysqld process pidpid
Open FilesNumber of DB files in open statecnt
Open Files [MAX]number of DB files that can be openedcnt
Open Files UsageDB file maximum count usage rate%
Relay Log Used [MB]relay log usage (MB)MB
Running Threadsrunning thread numbercnt
Safe PIDsafe program pidpid
Slave Behind Master secondstime difference with master nodesec
SlowqueriesNumber of SQL queries running for a long time (5 minutes or more) (by DB)cnt
Slowqueries [Total]Number of SQL queries running for a long time (5 minutes or more) (total)cnt
Tablespace UsedTablespace usageMB
Tablespace Used [Total]Tablespace total usageMB
Transaction Time [Long]Transaction longest execution timesec
Wait LocksNumber of sessions blocked for 60 seconds or more by lockcnt
Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

4.1.3 - ServiceWatch Metrics

MySQL sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by basic monitoring are data collected at a 1-minute interval.

Reference
To check metrics in ServiceWatch, refer to the ServiceWatch guide.

Basic Indicators

The following are the basic metrics for the MySQL namespace.

OS Basic Metrics

CategoryPerformance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnitMeaningful Statistics
CPUCPU UsageCPU UsagePercent
DiskDisk UsageDisk Usage RatePercent
DiskDisk Write BytesWrite capacity on block device (bytes/second)Bytes/Second
DiskDisk Read BytesAmount read from block device (bytes/second)Bytes/Second
DiskDisk Write RequestNumber of write requests in block device (requests/second)Count/Second
DiskDisk Read RequestsNumber of read requests on block device (requests/second)Count/Second
DiskAverage Disk I/O Queue SizeAverage queue length of requests issued to the block deviceNone
DiskDisk I/O UtilizationPercentage of time the block device actually processes I/O operationsPercent
MemoryMemory UsageMemory Usage RatePercent
NetworkNetwork In BytesReceived capacity on network interface (bytes/second)Bytes/Second
NetworkNetwork Out BytesAmount transmitted from the network interface (bytes/second)Bytes/Second
NetworkTCP ConnectionsTotal number of TCP connections currently properly establishedCount/Second
NetworkNetwork In PacketsNumber of packets received on the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork Out PacketsNumber of packets transmitted from the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork In DroppedNumber of packet drops received on the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork Out DroppedNumber of packet drops transmitted from the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork In ErrorsNumber of packet errors received on the network interfaceCount
NetworkNetwork Out ErrorsNumber of packet errors transmitted from the network interfaceCount
Table. OS Basic Metrics

MySQL Basic Metrics

CategoryPerformance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnitMeaningful Statistics
ActivelockActive locksNumber of active locksCount
ActivesessionActive sessionsNumber of active sessionsCount
ActivesessionConnection usageDB connection session usage ratePercent
ActivesessionConnectionsDB connection sessionCount
ActivesessionConnections(MAX)Maximum number of connections that can be attached to the DBCount
DatafileBinary log usedbinary log usage (MB)Megabytes
DatafileOpen filesNumber of DB files in open stateCount
DatafileOpen files(MAX)Number of DB files that can be openedCount
DatafileOpen files usageDB file maximum count usage ratePercent
DatafileRelay log usedRelay log usage(MB)Megabytes
InnoDBInnoDB buffer pool hit ratioPercent
InnoDBInnoDB row lock waitsNumber of InnoDB transactions currently waiting for a lock (Lock-wait)Count
InnoDBInnoDB row lock timeTotal time waited due to InnoDB row lock (in milliseconds)Count
InnoDBInnoDB table locks waitsNumber of times waiting occurred to acquire table lock (cumulative)Count
StateInstance stateMariaDB Process status up/down checkCount
StateSlave behind master seconds (Replica Only)Replica’s delay amount (unit: seconds)Seconds
StateReplica Thread running (Replica Only)
StateReplica io thread running (Replica Only)
StateReplica SQL thread running (Replica Only)
TablespaceTablespace usedTablespace usageMegabytes
TablespaceTablespace used(TOTAL)Tablespace usage (total)Megabytes
TransactionsSlow queriesNumber of slow queriesCount
TransactionsTransaction timeLong Transaction timeSeconds
TransactionsWait locksNumber of sessions waiting for lockCount
TransactionsSQL Queries/SecTotal number (cumulative) of all queries (statements) received from clients since the server startedCount
Table. MySQL basic metrics

4.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the MySQL(DBaaS) service by entering required information through Samsung Cloud Platform Console and selecting detailed options.

Create MySQL(DBaaS)

You can create and use the MySQL(DBaaS) service in Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Notice
  • Before creating the service, please configure the VPC’s Subnet type as General.
    • If the Subnet type is Local, the corresponding Database service cannot be created.
  • If loading large amounts of data of 2 TB or more, backup may take a long time or DB performance may deteriorate. To prevent this, consideration is needed from an operational perspective, such as cleaning unnecessary data or moving old data to a statistical collection environment

Follow these steps to create MySQL(DBaaS).

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create MySQL(DBaaS) button. You will move to the Create MySQL(DBaaS) page.
  3. On the Create MySQL(DBaaS) page, enter the information required for service creation and select detailed options.
    • Select the required information in the Image and Version Selection area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Image VersionRequiredMySQL(DBaaS) version list provided
      Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Image and Version Selection Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Entry area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Server Name PrefixRequiredServer name where DB will be installed
      • Starts with lowercase English letters, enter 3 to 13 characters using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
      • Actual server name is created with a postfix like 001, 002 based on the server name
      Cluster NameRequiredCluster name where DB servers are configured
      • Enter 3 to 20 characters using English letters
      • Cluster is a unit that bundles multiple servers
      Service Type > Server TypeRequiredServer type where DB will be installed
      • Standard: Standard specifications generally used
      • High Capacity: Large capacity server with 24vCore or more
      Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalResource status where Planned Compute is set
      • In Use: Number of resources in use among resources where Planned Compute is set
      • Set: Number of resources where Planned Compute is set
      • Coverage Preview: Amount applied as Planned Compute per resource
      • Create Planned Compute Service: Move to Planned Compute service application page
      Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage configuration used by DB according to purpose
      • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
      • DATA: Storage area for table data and archive files, etc.
        • Select storage type and enter capacity (For details on Block Storage types, refer to Create Block Storage)
          • SSD: High performance general volume
          • HDD: General volume
          • SSD_KMS, HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management System) encryption key
        • Configured Storage type is applied identically to additional storage as well
        • Enter capacity as a multiple of 8 in the range of 16 ~ 5,120
        • Since SQL execution or large Sort due to monthly batch, etc. may cause service interruption, separate TEMP storage must be allocated and used
      • Add: DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup data storage area
        • Select Use and enter the purpose and capacity of the storage
        • Storage type is applied identically as the type set in DATA, and capacity can be entered as a multiple of 8 in the range of 16 ~ 5,120
        • To add storage, click the + button, and to delete, click the x button. Maximum 9 can be added
        • Before transferring backup data, temporarily store backup data in BACKUP storage
          • If backup data exceeds 100 GB and there are many data changes, it is recommended to add separate BACKUP storage for stable backup. It is recommended to set backup capacity to about 60% of DATA capacity
          • If BACKUP storage is not added, the /tmp area is used, and backup fails if capacity is insufficient
        • Per service, only 1 Block Storage is allocated for Archive, TEMP, BACKUP storage
      Redundancy ConfigurationOptionalWhether to configure redundancy
      • If redundancy configuration is used, DB instance is configured as Active DB and Standby DB
      Network > Common SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in the service are installed
      • Select if you want to apply the same settings to all servers being installed
      • Select pre-created VPC and Subnet, IP, Public NAT
        • Only automatic creation is possible for IP
        • Public NAT function can be used only if VPC is connected to Internet Gateway. If you check Use, you can select from IPs reserved in Public IP of VPC product. For details, refer to Create Public IP
      Network > Per Server SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in the service are installed
      • Select if you want to apply different settings to each server being installed
      • Select pre-created VPC and Subnet, IP, Public NAT
        • Enter IP for each server
        • Public NAT function can be used only if VPC is connected to Internet Gateway. If you check Use, you can select from IPs reserved in Public IP of VPC product. For details, refer to Create Public IP
      IP Access ControlOptionalService access policy setting
      • Since access policy is set for IPs entered on the page, separate Security Group policy setting is not required
      • Enter in IP format (e.g., 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32), and click the Add button
      • To delete entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
      Maintenance WindowOptionalDB maintenance window
      • If you select Use, set day of week, start time, and duration
      • It is recommended to set a maintenance window for stable DB management. Patch work is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
      • If set to Not Used, Samsung SDS is not responsible for problems caused by not applying patches.
      Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Service Configuration Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Database Configuration Required Information Entry area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Database NameRequiredServer name applied when installing DB
      • Start with English letters, enter 3 to 20 characters using English letters and numbers
      Database UsernameRequiredDB user name
      • Account with that name is also created in OS
      • Enter 2 to 20 characters using lowercase English letters
      • Restricted Database usernames can be checked in Console
      Database PasswordRequiredPassword to use when accessing DB
      • Enter 8 to 30 characters including English letters, numbers, and special characters (excluding " )
      Database Password ConfirmRequiredRe-enter the password to use when accessing DB identically
      Database Port NumberRequiredPort number required for DB connection
      • Enter DB port in the range of 1200 ~ 65535
      Backup > UseOptionalWhether to use backup
      • Select Use to set backup file retention period, backup start time, and Archive backup cycle
      Backup > Retention PeriodOptionalBackup retention period
      • Select backup retention period. File retention period can be set from 7 days to 35 days
      • Separate charges occur for backup files according to capacity
      Backup > Backup Start PeriodOptionalBackup start time
      • Select backup start time
      • Minutes when backup is performed are set randomly, and backup end time cannot be set
      Backup > Archive Backup CycleOptionalArchive backup cycle
      • Select Archive backup cycle
      • Archive backup cycle of 1 hour is recommended. If you select 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, it may affect DB performance
      ParameterRequiredParameters to use in DB
      • Click the View button to check detailed information of parameters
      • Parameters can be modified after DB creation is completed, and after modification, DB must be restarted
      DB Character SetRequiredCharacter encoding method to use in DB
      Table Case SensitivityOptionalWhether DB Table is case-sensitive
      Time ZoneRequiredStandard time zone where Database will be used
      ServiceWatch Log CollectionOptionalWhether to collect ServiceWatch logs
      • Select Use to set ServiceWatch log collection function
      • Provided free up to 5 GB for all services in Account, and if exceeding 5 GB, charges are incurred according to storage capacity
      • When collecting, log group and log stream are automatically created and cannot be deleted until resource is deleted
      • To prevent exceeding 5 GB, direct deletion of log data or shortening of retention period is recommended
      Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Database Configuration Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Entry area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Can add up to 50 per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Additional Information Entry Items
  4. On the Summary panel, check the created detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.
    • When creation is completed, check the created resource on the Resource List page.

Check MySQL(DBaaS) Detailed Information

MySQL(DBaaS) service allows you to check and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The MySQL(DBaaS) Details page is composed of Detailed Information, Tags, Operation History tabs, and for DBs where Replica is configured, the Replica Information tab is additionally configured.

Follow these steps to check the detailed information of MySQL(DBaaS) service.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose detailed information you want to check. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
    • At the top of the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page, status information and additional feature information are displayed.
      ClassificationDetailed Description
      Cluster StatusStatus of cluster where DB is installed
      • Creating: Creating cluster
      • Editing: Changing cluster to Operation execution status
      • Error: Status where failure occurred while cluster was performing task
        • If it occurs continuously, contact administrator
      • Failed: Status where cluster failed during creation process
      • Restarting: Restarting cluster
      • Running: Status where cluster is operating normally
      • Starting: Starting cluster
      • Stopped: Status where cluster is stopped
      • Stopping: Stopping cluster
      • Synchronizing: Synchronizing cluster
      • Terminating: Deleting cluster
      • Unknown: Status where cluster status cannot be known
        • If it occurs continuously, contact administrator
      • Upgrading: Changing cluster to upgrade execution status
      Cluster ControlButtons to change cluster status
      • Start: Start stopped cluster
      • Stop: Stop running cluster
      • Restart: Restart running cluster
      • Switch-Over: Switch Standby cluster to Active
      More FeaturesCluster-related management buttons
      • Sync Service Status: Check real-time DB service status
      • Backup History: If backup is set, check whether backup was executed normally and history
      • Database Recovery: Recover DB based on specific point in time
      • Parameter Management: View and modify DB configuration parameters
      • Replica Configuration: Configure Replica which is read-only cluster
      • Replica Configuration (Other-Region): Configure Replica for disaster recovery in another region, button is deactivated if there is no region configured in that Account
      • DB User Management: View and manage DB account (user) information registered in DB
      • DB Access Control Management: Register and cancel access allowed IP based on DB accounts registered in DB
      • Archive Management: Set Archive file retention period and Archive mode can be set
      • DB Log Export: Logs stored through Audit settings can be exported to user’s Object Storage
      • Migration Configuration: Provide Migration function using Replication method
      • OS (Kernel) Upgrade: Upgrade OS Kernel version
      Service TerminationButton to terminate service
      Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Status Information and Additional Features

Detailed Information

On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify information if necessary.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Server InformationServer information configured in that cluster
  • Category: Server type (Active, Standby, Replica)
  • Server Name: Server name
  • IP:Port: Server IP and port
  • Status: Server status
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In DB service, it means cluster SRN
Resource NameResource name
  • In DB service, it means cluster name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation DateDate when service was created
ModifierUser who modified service information
Modification DateDate when service information was modified
Image VersionInstalled DB image and version information
  • If version upgrade is needed, click the Edit icon to set
Cluster TypeCluster type (Master Cluster, Replica Cluster, Migration Cluster)
Cluster NameCluster name where DB servers are configured
Master Cluster NameMaster cluster name of Replica
  • Can be checked if it is Replica’s detailed information
Database NameServer name applied when installing DB
Database UsernameDB user name
Planned ComputeResource status where Planned Compute is set
Maintenance WindowDB maintenance window status
  • If maintenance window setting is needed, click the Edit icon to set
BackupBackup setting status
  • If backup setting is needed, click the Edit icon to set
ServiceWatch Log CollectionServiceWatch log collection setting status
  • If log collection setting is needed, click the Edit icon next to log collection to set
DB Character SetEncoding method to use in DB
Table Case SensitivityWhether DB Table is case-sensitive
Time ZoneStandard time zone where Database will be used
VIPVirtual IP information
  • Can be checked only if high availability is set
NetworkNetwork information where DB is installed (VPC, Subnet, VIP, NAT IP (VIP))
IP Access ControlService access policy setting
  • If IP addition or deletion is needed, click the Edit icon to set
Active & StandbyActive/Standby server type, basic OS, additional Disk information
  • If server type modification is needed, click the Edit icon next to server type to set. For server type modification procedure, refer to Change Server Type
    • Server restart is required when server type is modified
  • If storage expansion is needed, click the Edit icon next to storage capacity to expand. For storage expansion procedure, refer to Expand Storage
  • If storage addition is needed, click the Add Disk button next to additional Disk to add. For storage addition procedure, refer to Add Storage
Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Database Detailed Information Items

Replica Information

The Replica Information tab is activated only if Replica is configured in the cluster. Through the Replica Information tab, you can check the Master cluster name, number of replicas, and Replica status.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Master InformationName of Master cluster
Replica CountNumber of Replicas created in Master cluster
Replica StatusReplica server status created in Master cluster
  • Can check server name, status check, status details, status check time
  • To check Replica status, click the Check Status button
    • While checking, cluster maintains Synchronizing status, and when check is completed, cluster changes to Running status
Table. Replica Information Tab Detailed Information Items

Tags

On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can check tag Key, Value information
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select pre-created Key and Value lists
Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Tags Tab Items

Operation History

On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, you can check the operation history of the selected resource.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Check operation date, resource ID, resource name, operation details, event topic, operation result, operator information
Table. Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Manage MySQL(DBaaS) Resources

If you need to change existing configuration options of created MySQL(DBaaS) resources, or need recovery or Replica configuration, you can perform tasks on the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.

Control Operation

If changes occur to running MySQL(DBaaS) resources, you can start, stop, or restart. Additionally, if HA is configured, you can switch Active-Standby servers through Switch-over.

Follow these steps to control operation of MySQL(DBaaS).

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to control operation. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Check MySQL(DBaaS) status and complete the change through the control buttons below.
    • Start: Server and DB service where DB is installed run (Running).
    • Stop: Server and DB service where DB is installed stop (Stopped).
    • Restart: Only DB service is restarted.
    • Switch Over: Can swap Active server and Standby server of DB.

Sync Service Status

You can synchronize the real-time service status of MySQL(DBaaS).

Follow these steps to check the service status of MySQL(DBaaS).

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to check service status. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Sync Service Status button. While checking, cluster changes to Synchronizing status.
  5. When check is completed, status is updated in the server information item, and cluster changes to Running status

Change Server Type

You can change the configured server type.

Follow these steps to change server type.

Caution
  • Server restart is required when modifying server type. Please check SW license modification matters or SW settings and reflection according to spec change separately.
  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to change server type. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of the server type you want to change at the bottom of detailed information. The Edit Server Type popup window opens.
  5. On the Edit Server Type popup window, select server type and click the Confirm button.

Add Storage

If you need more than 5 TB of data storage space, you can add storage. For DB configured with redundancy, it is added to both redundancy servers simultaneously.

Caution
  • It is applied identically as the Storage type selected when creating the service.
  • For DB with high availability setting, when adding storage, it is applied to both Active DB and Standby DB storage simultaneously.
  • If Replica exists, Master cluster storage cannot be smaller than Replica storage. Please expand Replica storage first and then expand Master cluster storage
  • When adding Archive/Temp storage, DB restarts and cannot be used temporarily

Follow these steps to add storage.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to add storage. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Add Disk button at the bottom of detailed information. The Additional Storage Request popup window opens.
  5. On the Additional Storage Request popup window, enter purpose and capacity, then click the Confirm button.

Expand Storage

Storage added as data area can be expanded up to 5 TB based on initially allocated capacity. For DB configured with redundancy, it is expanded to both redundancy servers simultaneously.

Follow these steps to expand storage capacity.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to change server type. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of the additional Disk you want to expand at the bottom of detailed information. The Edit Additional Storage popup window opens.
  5. On the Edit Additional Storage popup window, enter expansion capacity and click the Confirm button.

Terminate MySQL(DBaaS)

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused MySQL(DBaaS). However, when terminating the service, the running service may be immediately interrupted, so you should fully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with termination.

Caution
  • For DB where Replica is configured, even if Master DB is terminated, Replica is not deleted together. If you want to delete Replica as well, please terminate separately from the resource list.
  • When terminating DB, stored data and if backup is set, all backup data including backup data are deleted.

Follow these steps to terminate MySQL(DBaaS).

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, select the resource to terminate and click the Terminate Service button.
  4. When termination is completed, check whether the resource is terminated on the MySQL(DBaaS) list page.

4.2.1 - MySQL(DBaaS) server connection

Scenario Overview

The MySQL(DBaaS) server connection scenario is a scenario where a Bastion host (Virtual Server) and Database service are created, and the DB service is accessed through the Bastion host. To connect to MySQL(DBaaS) stably in the Samsung Cloud Platform environment, it is necessary to create a Bastion host and use it for network connection. To maintain a stable and high level of security, it is recommended to configure the Database service in a Private Subnet environment and configure the Bastion host in a limited Public Subnet environment.

This scenario largely describes the process of creating a Bastion host and Database service, and configuring the network environment for Bastion host and Database connection, so that it can be accessed through a DB connection client.

Architecture
Figure. MySQL(DBaaS) server connection architecture

Scenario Components

You can configure the scenario using the following services.

Service Group
Service
Detailed Description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingVPC > SubnetA service that allows users to subdivide the network into smaller sections for specific purposes/sizes within the VPC
NetworkingVPC > Public IPA service that reserves a public IP and assigns and returns it to Compute resources
NetworkingVPC > Internet GatewayA service that connects VPC resources to the internet
NetworkingSecurity GroupA virtual firewall that controls the server’s traffic
DatabaseMySQL(DBaaS)A service that easily creates and manages MySQL in a web environment
ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
ComputeVirtual Server > KeypairEncryption file used to connect to Virtual Server
Table. List of scenario components
Reference
The default policy of the * Security Group is Deny All, so only allowed IPs should be registered. The In/Outbound’s All Open policy (Any IP, Any Port) can expose cloud resources to external threats. * By specifying the necessary IP and Port, you can enhance security by setting up a policy.

Scenario composition method

To configure the scenario, create the necessary services through the following procedure.

1. Configuring the Network

This explains the process of configuring the network environment for Bastion Host and Database service connection.

1-1. Creating a VPC

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC button. It moves to the Create VPC page.
  3. VPC Creation page, please enter the information needed to create the service.
    • IP range should be entered as 192.168.x.0/16.
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charge, then click the Complete button.
    • Once the creation is complete, check the created resource on the VPC list page.

1-2. Creating a Subnet

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Subnet guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Service Home page, click the Subnet menu. It moves to the Subnet list page.
  3. Click the Subnet Creation button. It moves to the Subnet Creation page.
  4. Subnet creation page where you enter the information needed to create a service.
    • Subnet type should be selected as General.
    • Please select a pre-created VPC.
    • IP range should be entered as 192.168.x.0/24.
  5. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, then click the Complete button.
    • After creation is complete, check the created resource on the Subnet list page.

1-3. Creating an Internet Gateway

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Internet Gateway guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. It moves to the Internet Gateway list page.
  3. Click the Create Internet Gateway button. It moves to the Create Internet Gateway page.
  4. Internet Gateway creation page, please enter the required information necessary for service creation.
    • Please select a pre-created VPC.
    • Select use in the Firewall usage item.
  5. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, then click the Complete button.
    • Once the creation is complete, check the created resource on the Internet Gateway list page.

1-4. Creating a Public IP

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Public IP guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Click the Public IP menu on the Service Home page. It moves to the Public IP list page.
  3. Public IP Reservation button, click. Move to the Public IP Reservation page.
  4. Public IP Reservation page where you enter the required information necessary for service reservation.
  5. Check the detailed information generated in the Summary panel and the expected bill amount, and click the Complete button.
    • After creation is complete, check the created resource on the Public IP List page.

1-5. Creating a Security Group

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click the menu for all services > Networking > Security Group. It moves to the Service Home page of Security Group.
  2. Click the Security Group Creation button on the Service Home page. It moves to the Security Group Creation page.
  3. Security Group creation page where you enter the required information necessary for service creation.
  4. Check the input information and click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Security Group list page

2. Creating a Bastion Host

This describes the process of configuring the Bastion Host where the database connection client should be installed.

2-1. Creating a Server Keypair

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides > Keypair guide.
  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Keypair menu on the Service Home page. It moves to the Keypair list page.
  3. Keypair creation button should be clicked. It moves to the Keypair creation page.
  4. Keypair creation page, please enter the required information necessary for service creation.
  5. Check the creation information and click the Complete button.
    • The key can only be downloaded for the first time, and re-issuance is not provided.
    • Please keep the downloaded key in a safe place.

2-2. Creating a Bastion Host

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Click the Virtual Server Creation button on the Service Home page. It moves to the Virtual Server Creation page.
  3. Virtual Server Creation page, please enter the required information necessary for service creation.
  4. Summary panel, check the detailed information generated and the expected billing amount, and click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Virtual Server list page.

2-3. Check Bastion host connection ID and PW

  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. Move to the Virtual Server list page.
  3. Virtual Serve list page, click on the resource created in 2-2. Creating a Bastion host. It moves to the detailed information page of the corresponding resource.
  4. Click the RDP password inquiry button in the Keypair item on the detailed information page. The RDP password inquiry popup window opens.
  5. RDP password inquiry popup window, attach the keypair file downloaded from 2-1. Creating a server keypair.
  6. After attaching, click the Password Check button. The ID and password required to access the resource will be displayed.

3. Creating a Database

It describes the process of creating a database service.

3-1. Creating a MySQL (DBaaS) Service

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Database > MySQL(DBaaS) > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click on the menu for all services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS). It moves to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create MySQL(DBaaS) button. It moves to the Create MySQL(DBaaS) page.
  3. MySQL(DBaaS) creation page, please enter the required information needed for service creation.
    • Select and connect the pre-created VPC and Subnet.
    • Enter database-related creation information on the required information input screen.
    • Add the Bastion host IP to the IP access control item.
    • Database Port is 2866 by default, but you can specify it as you want.
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, then click the Complete button.
    • Once the creation is complete, check the created resource on the MySQL(DBaaS) list page.

4. Setting Rules

This explains the process of setting rules for users to access the Bastion host and rules for the Bastion host to access the Database.

4-1. Adding Security Group Security Rules

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click the menu for all services > Networking > Security Group. It moves to the Service Home page of Security Group.
  2. Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. Move to the Security Group list page.
  3. 1-5. Creating a Security Group Select the Security Group resource created from. It will move to the detailed information page of the corresponding resource.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the detailed information page. It moves to the Rules tab.
  5. Click the Rule tab and click the Add Rule button. It moves to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. Add Rule popup window, enter the rules below, and click the OK button
DirectionRemoteDestination AddressProtocolPortDescription
InboundCIDRUser PC IPTCP3389 (RDP)Bastion connection PC → Bastion host
OutboundCIDRDB IPTCPDatabase Port (direct input)Bastion host → Database
Fig. Security Group security rules to be added

4-2. Adding IGW Firewall Rules

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > Firewall > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > Firewall menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Firewall.
  2. Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. It moves to the Firewall list page.
  3. Firewall list page, select the Internet Gateway resource name created in 1-3. Creating Internet Gateway, and move to the detailed information page of the corresponding resource.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the detailed information page. It moves to the Rules tab.
  5. Click the Rule tab and click the Add Rule button. It moves to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. Add Rule In the popup window, enter the rules below and click the OK button.
Departure AddressDestination AddressProtocolPortActionDirectionDescription
Bastion connection PC IPBastion host IPTCP3389(RDP)AllowInboundUser PC → Bastion host
Fig. Internet Gateway Firewall rules to be added

5. Connect to Database

This describes the process of a user accessing the Database through a DB connection client program.

This guide provides instructions on how to connect using MySQL Workbench. There are various database client programs and CLI utilities, so you can install and use the tools that suit you.

5-1. Connecting to the Bastion host

  1. Run Remote Desktop Connection in the Windows environment of the PC you want to access the Bastion host, enter the NAT IP of the Bastion Host, and click the Connect button.
  2. After a successful remote desktop connection, the User Credential Input Window opens. Enter the ID and Password confirmed in 2-3. Checking Bastion Host Access ID and PW and click the Confirm button.

5-2. Install DB connection client program (MySQL Workbench) on the Bastion host

  1. Go to the official MySQL page and download the MySQL Workbench program.
  2. Connect the hard drive of the user’s PC to upload the file to the Bastion host.
  3. Click the Details button for local devices and resources entries in the Local Resources tab of Remote Desktop Connection.
  4. Select the local disk where the file was downloaded to the drive and click the Confirm button.
  5. Copy the downloaded file and upload it to the Bastion Host, then click the MySQL Workbench installation file to install it.

5-3. Using DB connection client program (MySQL Workbench) to connect to the Database

  1. Run MySQL Workbench and click Database > Manage connections. The Manage Server Connection popup window will appear.
  2. Manage Server Connection popup window, click the New button at the bottom left and enter the database server information created in 3-1. MySQL(DBaaS) service creation, then click the Test Connection button. A Password popup window will appear.
    Required Input Element ItemsInput Value
    Connection NameCustom (ex. Service Name)
    Host nameDatabase server IP
    PortDatabase Port
    UsernameDatabase username
    DB connection client program input items
  3. In the Password popup window, enter the password set in 3-1. MySQL(DBaaS) service creation and click the OK button. When the connection is successful, click the OK button in the Manage Server Connection popup window.
  4. Database > Connect to Database should be clicked. The Connect to Database popup window will appear.
  5. Select the Connection Name registered in Stored Connection to perform database connection. After connection, you can try simple queries, etc.

4.2.2 - Manage DB Service

Users can manage MySQL(DBaaS) through Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Manage Parameters

Provides functionality to easily view and modify database configuration parameters.

View Parameters

Follow these steps to view configuration parameters.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose parameters you want to view and modify. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Parameter Management button. The Parameter Management popup window opens.
  5. On the Parameter Management popup window, click the View button. The View Notification popup window opens.
  6. When the View Notification popup window opens, click the Confirm button. It takes some time to view.

Modify Parameters

Follow these steps to modify configuration parameters.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose parameters you want to view and modify. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Parameter Management button. The Parameter Management popup window opens.
  5. On the Parameter Management popup window, click the View button. The View Notification popup window opens.
  6. When the View Notification popup window opens, click the Confirm button. It takes some time to view.
  7. If modification is needed, click the Edit button and enter modification content in the user-defined value area of the Parameter to modify.
  8. When input is completed, click the Complete button.
Reference

When changing character_set_server value, first check the collation matching that character set with the following command.

SQL> SHOW COLLATION WHERE Charset = 'character set name';

Set parameter values of character-set-server, collation-server, init_connect with the confirmed collation.

ItemDetailed DescriptionRestart Required
character-set-serverSpecify default character setRestart Required
collation-serverSpecify default collationRestart Required
init_connectSQL statement executed when Client connects to databaseNo Restart Required
Table. Parameter Setting Items

Manage DB Users

Provides management functionality to view DB user information and change status information.

View DB Users

Follow these steps to view DB users.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose DB users you want to view. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB User Management button. You will move to the DB User Management page.
  5. On the DB User Management page, click the View button. It takes some time to view.

Change DB User Status

Follow these steps to change the status of viewed DB users.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose DB users you want to modify. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB User Management button. You will move to the DB User Management page.
  5. On the DB User Management page, click the View button. It takes some time to view.
  6. If modification is needed, click the Edit button and change the status area value or enter remarks content.
  7. When input is completed, click the Complete button.

Manage DB Access Control

Provides IP-based DB user access control management functionality. Users can directly specify IPs that can access the database and set it so that only allowed IPs can access.

Notice
Please perform DB user viewing before setting DB access control. For DB user viewing, refer to Manage DB Users.

View DB Access Control

Follow these steps to view DB users where IP access control is set.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose access control you want to manage. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Access Control Management button. You will move to the DB Access Control Management page.
  5. On the DB Access Control Management page, click the View button. It takes some time to view.

Add DB Access Control

Follow these steps to add IP access control.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose IP access control you want to add. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Access Control Management button. You will move to the DB Access Control Management page.
  5. On the DB Access Control Management page, click the View button. It takes some time to view.
  6. When viewing is completed, click the Add button. The Add DB Access Control popup window opens.
  7. On the Add DB Access Control popup window, select DB username and enter IP Address.
  8. When input is completed, click the Complete button.

Delete DB Access Control

Follow these steps to delete IP access control.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose IP access control you want to delete. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Access Control Management button. You will move to the DB Access Control Management page.
  5. On the DB Access Control Management page, click the View button. It takes some time to view.
  6. When viewing is completed, click the Delete button. The Delete popup window opens.
  7. On the Delete popup window, click the Confirm button.

Manage Archive

Provides Archive mode setting and Archive Log retention period setting functionality so users can flexibly set Archive log management policies according to their operating environment. Additionally, it provides functionality to manually delete Archive logs together, enabling efficient management of system resources by cleaning unnecessary log data.

Notice
When creating the service, default settings are Archive mode use and retention period of 3 days.

Set Archive Mode

Follow these steps to set Archive mode.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose Archive mode you want to set. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Archive Settings Management button. You will move to the Archive Settings Management page.
  5. On the Archive Settings Management page, click the View button. It takes some time to view.
  6. Click the Edit button and select whether to use and retention period.
  7. When modification is completed, click the Complete button.

Delete Archive Files

Follow these steps to delete Archive files.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose Archive mode you want to set. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Archive Settings Management button. You will move to the Archive Settings Management page.
  5. On the Archive Settings Management page, if you want to delete all Archive files, click the Delete All Archives button, and if you want to delete only backed-up Archive files, click the Delete Backed-up Archives button.

Export DB Log

Supports exporting log data requiring long-term retention among audit (Audit) logs to Object Storage. Users can directly set the log type requiring storage, target Bucket to export, and cycle to export logs. According to the set criteria, logs are copied and stored to the specified Object Storage. Additionally, for efficient management of disk space, it also provides an option to automatically delete original log files while exporting logs to Object Storage. By using that option, you can effectively secure storage capacity while safely storing necessary log data for long-term retention

Notice
  • Object Storage creation is required to use DB Log Export functionality. For Object Storage creation, refer to Object Storage User Guide.
  • Please make sure to check the expiration date of the authentication key. If the authentication key expires, logs are not stored in the Bucket.
  • Please be careful not to expose authentication key information to the outside.

Set DB Log Export Mode

Follow these steps to set DB Log export mode.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose DB logs you want to export. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Log Export button. You will move to the DB Log Export page.
  5. On the DB Log Export page, click the Register button. You will move to the DB Log Export Register page.
  6. On the DB Log Export Register page, enter the information and click the Complete button.
    ClassificationRequired
    Detailed Description
    Log TypeRequiredLog type to store
    Storage Bucket NameRequiredObject Storage Bucket name to store
    Authentication Key > Access keyRequiredAccess key to access Object Storage to store
    Authentication Key > Secret keyRequiredSecret key to access Object Storage to store
    File Creation CycleRequiredCycle to create files in Object Storage
    Original Log DeletionOptionalWhether to delete original log while exporting to Object Storage
    Table. MySQL(DBaaS) DB Log Export Configuration Items

Manage DB Log Export

Follow these steps to modify, terminate, or immediately export DB Log export settings.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose DB Log export you want to manage. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Log Export button. You will move to the DB Log Export page.
  5. On the DB Log Export page, click the More button according to the log type you want to manage and click the Immediate Export, Edit, Terminate buttons.
    • Immediate Export: Selected logs are exported to the Bucket of Object Storage previously set.
    • Edit: Modifies DB Log export mode settings.
    • Terminate: Terminates DB Log export mode settings.

Minor Version Upgrade

Provides version upgrade functionality for some feature improvements and security patches. Only Minor version upgrade functionality within the same Major version is supported.

Caution
  • Please check service status through service status synchronization first, then perform version upgrade.
  • Please proceed with version upgrade after setting backup. If backup is not set, some data may not be recoverable when problems occur during update.
  • In DB where Replica is configured, Master DB version cannot be higher than Replica version. Please check Replica version first and perform version upgrade if needed.
  • Backed-up data is automatically deleted after version upgrade is completed.

Follow these steps to upgrade version.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose version you want to upgrade. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Edit button in the Image Version item. The Version Upgrade popup window opens.
  5. On the Version Upgrade popup window, select modified version and whether to set backup, then click the Confirm button.
  6. On the Version Upgrade Notification popup window, click the Confirm button.

Configure Migration

Provides Migration functionality that replicates in real-time while synchronizing with the operating database using Replication method without service interruption.

Notice
For detailed Migration configuration guide, refer to Architecture Center > Migration Guide.

Follow these steps to configure Migration.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to migrate. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Migration Configuration button. The Migration Configuration popup window opens.
  5. On the Migration Configuration popup window, check the notice and click the Confirm button. You will move to the Migration Configuration page.
  6. On the Migration Configuration page, enter the information and click the Connection Check button.
  7. When connection is completed, click the Complete button.
    ClassificationRequired
    Detailed Description
    Source DB Database NameRequiredDatabase name of Source DB to be Migration target
    Source DB IPRequiredIP of Source DB to be Migration target
    Source DB PortRequiredPort of Source DB to be Migration target
    Source DB UsernameRequiredUsername of Source DB to be Migration target
    Source DB PasswordRequiredPassword of Source DB to be Migration target
    Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Migration Configuration Items

Promote Migration Cluster to Master Cluster

You can promote the configured Migration Cluster to Master Cluster.

Caution
When promoting to Master, synchronization with Source DB which is Migration target stops.

Follow these steps to promote Migration Cluster to Master.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to promote to Master. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Master Promotion button. The Master Promotion Notification popup window opens.
  5. On the Master Promotion Notification popup window, click the Confirm button.

Upgrade OS Kernel

You can upgrade OS Kernel for operating database feature improvements and security patch application.

Caution
  • Service is interrupted while OS upgrade is in progress.
  • Upgrade time may vary depending on version, and if upgrade fails, it reverts to previous configuration.
  • Cannot recover to previous OS after upgrade is completed.

Follow these steps to upgrade OS Kernel.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource whose OS Kernel you want to upgrade. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the OS (Kernel) Upgrade button. The OS (Kernel) Upgrade Notification popup window opens.
  5. On the OS (Kernel) Upgrade Notification popup window, check the notice and click the Confirm button.

4.2.3 - DB Backup and Recovery

The user can set up a backup of MySQL(DBaaS) through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and restore it with the backed-up file.

MySQL(DBaaS) Backup

PostgreSQL(DBaaS) provides a data backup feature based on its own backup command. It also provides an optimized backup environment for data protection and management through backup history checking and backup file deletion functions.

Setting up backup

The method of setting up a backup for MySQL(DBaaS) is described in MySQL(DBaaS) creation guide.

To modify the backup settings of the generated resource, follow these steps.

Caution
  • For stable backup, it is recommended to add a separate BACKUP storage or to sufficiently expand the storage capacity. Especially when the backup target data exceeds 100 GB and the data change is frequent, please secure additional storage equivalent to about 60% of the data capacity. For storage addition and expansion methods, please refer to the MySQL(DBaaS) Add Storage, MySQL(DBaaS) Expand Storage guides. If backup is set, backup is performed at the specified time after the set time, and additional fees are incurred depending on the backup capacity.
  • If the backup setting is changed to unset, the backup operation will be stopped immediately, and the saved backup data will be deleted and can no longer be used.

To set up backup, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu is clicked. It moves to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. Move to the MySQL(DBaaS) list page.
  3. MySQL(DBaaS) list page, click the resource to set the backup. It moves to the MySQL(DBaaS) details page.
  4. Click the Edit button of the backup item. The Backup Settings popup window opens.
  5. If you set up a backup, click Use in the Backup Settings popup window, select the retention period, backup start time, and Archive backup cycle, and then click the Confirm button.
    • If you want to stop the backup settings, uncheck Use in the Backup Settings popup window and click the OK button.

Check Backup History

Notice
To set up notifications for backup success and failure, you can set it up through the Notification Manager product. For detailed usage guidelines on notification policy settings, please refer to Creating a Notification Policy.

To view the backup history, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu is clicked. It moves to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MySQL(DBaaS) list page.
  3. MySQL(DBaaS) list page, click the resource to check the backup history. Move to the MySQL(DBaaS) details page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup window opens.
  5. Backup History popup window where you can check the backup status, version, backup start time, backup completion time, and capacity.

Delete backup files

Caution
Backup files cannot be restored after deletion. Please make sure to confirm that the data is unnecessary before deleting it.

To delete the backup history, follow these steps.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MySQL(DBaaS) list page.
  3. MySQL(DBaaS) list page, click the resource to check the backup history. Move to the MySQL(DBaaS) detail page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup window opens.
  5. Backup History popup window, check the file you want to delete, and then click the Delete button.

Recovering MySQL(DBaaS)

In the event of a failure or data loss that requires restoration from a backup file, recovery is possible based on a specific point in time through the recovery function. When performing MySQL (DBaaS) recovery, a new server is created with the OS image at the initial provisioning time, the DB is installed with the version at the backup point in time, and the recovery proceeds with the DB configuration information and data.

Caution
To perform recovery, at least 2 times the capacity of the data type Disk capacity is required. If the disk capacity is insufficient, recovery may fail.

To restore MySQL(DBaaS), follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu is clicked. It moves to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the MySQL(DBaaS) list page.
  3. MySQL(DBaaS) resource list page, click the resource you want to restore. It moves to the MySQL(DBaaS) details page.
  4. Database Recovery Click the button. Database Recovery Navigate to the page.
  5. Enter the corresponding information in the Database Recovery Configuration area, and then click the Complete button.
Classification
Necessity
Detailed Description
Recovery TypeRequiredSet the point in time you want to recover
  • Backup Point (Recommended): Recover based on the backup file. Select from the list of backup file points displayed in the list
  • Custom Point: Recover to the desired point within the range of possible backup times. The recoverable period is from the initial backup start time to the current time, based on the Archive backup cycle setting value, and can be recovered up to 1 hour/30 minutes/10 minutes/5 minutes ago. Select the date and time you want to back up
Server name prefixRequiredServer name of the recovery DB
  • Start with lowercase English letters, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-) to input 3 ~ 16 characters
  • A postfix such as 001, 002 is attached based on the server name, and the actual server name is created
Cluster NameRequiredCluster name of the recovery DB
  • Enter in English, 3-20 characters
  • Cluster is a unit that bundles multiple servers
Service Type > Server TypeRequiredServer type where the recovery DB will be installed
  • Standard: Standard specification commonly used
  • High Capacity: High-capacity server with 24vCore or more (to be provided later)
Service Type > Planned ComputeSelectionCurrent status of resources with Planned Compute set
  • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute set that are currently in use
  • Setting: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
  • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by Planned Compute for each resource
  • Create Planned Compute Service: Move to the Planned Compute service application page
Service Type > Block StorageRequiredRecovery DB uses Block Storage settings
  • Basic OS: Area where the DB engine is installed
  • DATA: Storage area for table data, archive files, etc.
    • The storage type set in the original cluster is applied in the same way
    • Capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 in the range of 16 to 5,120
  • Additional: DATA, Archive, TEMP, Backup data storage area
    • The storage type set in the original cluster is applied in the same way
    • Only DATA, TEMP, and Archive purposes can be added in the recovery DB
    • After selecting Use, enter the purpose and capacity of the storage
    • To add storage, click the + button, and to delete, click the x button
    • Capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 in the range of 16 to 5,120, and up to 9 can be created
Database usernamerequiredDatabase username set in the original DB
Database Port numberrequiredDatabase Port number set in the original DB
IP Access ControlSelectIP address to access the recovery DB
  • Enter in IP format (e.g., 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.1/32, 192.168.10.1/32) and click the Add button
  • To delete the entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
Maintenance periodSelectDB maintenance period
  • Use is selected to set the day, start time, and duration
  • It is recommended to set the maintenance period for stable management of the DB, and patch work is performed at the set time, resulting in service interruption
  • If not used, Samsung SDS is not responsible for any problems that occur due to non-application of patches.
tagselectionadd tag
  • add tag button, click after Key, Value value input or selection
Fig. MySQL(DBaaS) Recovery Configuration Items

4.2.4 - Configure Read Replica

Users can create the service by entering required information for Read Replica through Samsung Cloud Platform Console and selecting detailed options.

Configure Replica

Through Replica configuration, you can create replica servers for read-only or disaster recovery purposes. You can create up to 5 Replicas per Database.

Notice
To configure Replica for disaster recovery, please create through Replica Configuration (Other Region).

Follow these steps to configure Replica.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to configure Replica. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Replica Configuration button. You will move to the Replica Configuration page.
  5. After entering information in the Replica Configuration area, click the Complete button.
    Classification
    Required
    Detailed Description
    RegionRequiredRegion to configure Replica
    • Displayed only when Replica Configuration (Other Region) is selected
    Replica CountRequiredNumber of Replicas to configure
    • Can configure up to 5 per cluster
    • If you select a value of 2 or more, you need to additionally enter Replica name and service type information
    Replica NameRequiredReplica server name
    • Start with lowercase English letters and enter 3 to 19 characters using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
    • Entered Replica name is displayed as cluster name in the list
    Service Type > Server TypeRequiredReplica server type
    • Standard: Standard specifications generally used
    • High Capacity: Large capacity server with 24vCore or more
    Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalResource status where Planned Compute is set
    • In Use: Number of resources in use among resources where Planned Compute is set
    • Set: Number of resources where Planned Compute is set
    • Coverage Preview: Amount applied as Planned Compute per resource
    • Create Planned Compute Service: Move to Planned Compute service application page
    IP Access ControlOptionalService access policy setting
    • Since access policy is set for IPs entered on the page, separate Security Group policy setting is not required
    • Enter in IP format (e.g., 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32), and click the Add button
    • To delete entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
    Maintenance WindowOptionalDB maintenance window
    • If you select Use, set day of week, start time, and duration
    • It is recommended to set a maintenance window for stable DB management. Patch work is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
    • If set to Not Used, Samsung SDS is not responsible for problems caused by not applying patches.
    TagsOptionalAdd tags
    • Click the Add Tag button and then enter or select Key, Value values
    Table. MySQL(DBaaS) Replica Configuration Items

Reconfigure Replica

In case of network failure or Replication delay with Master Cluster occurs, you can replicate Master Cluster’s data again through Replica reconfiguration functionality.

Follow these steps to reconfigure Replica.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to reconfigure Replica. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Replica Reconfiguration button. The Replica Reconfiguration Notification popup window opens.
  5. On the Replica Reconfiguration Notification popup window, click the Confirm button.

Promote Replica Cluster to Master Cluster

You can promote the configured Replica Cluster to Master Cluster.

Caution
When promoting to Master, synchronization with existing Master Cluster stops.

Follow these steps to promote Replica Cluster to Master.

  1. Click All Services > Database > MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Service Home page of MySQL(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the MySQL(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the MySQL(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to promote to Master. You will move to the MySQL(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Master Promotion button. The Master Promotion Notification popup window opens.
  5. On the Master Promotion Notification popup window, click the Confirm button.

4.3 - API Reference

API Reference

4.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

4.5 - Release Note

MySQL(DBaaS)

2026.03.19
FEATURE Disaster recovery Replica configuration, OS(Kernel) upgrade function added, Servicewatch integration function provided
  • You can configure a disaster recovery Replica through the Replica configuration (Other Region) function.
  • Enhances latest security patches and stability through the OS(Kernel) upgrade function.
  • You can monitor metrics and logs through integration with Servicewatch.
2025.07.01
FEATURE User(access control) management, Archive setting function added, DB Audit Log export function added, backup notification function provided, Migration function added
  • MySQL(DBaaS) function additions
    • 2nd generation server type added
      • Added 2nd generation (db2) server type based on Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Processor. For details, refer to MySQL(DBaaS) Server Type
    • DB user and access control management and Archive setting function added
    • DB Audit Log export function added
    • Backup notification function provided
    • Migration function added
      • Provides non-stop data migration function based on Replication. For details, refer to Configure Migration
    • Added HDD, HDD_KMS types to Block Storage type
2025.02.27
FEATURE Server type added and per-server IP setting, Block Storage capacity expansion function added
  • MySQL(DBaaS) function changes
    • 2nd generation server type added
      • Added 2nd generation (dbh2) server type based on Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Processor. For details, refer to MySQL(DBaaS) Server Type
    • After service creation, Block Storage capacity expansion is possible.
    • Per-server network IP setting function added to allow common settings or per-server settings depending on usage purpose.
  • Samsung Cloud Platform common function changes
    • Reflected common CX changes for Account, IAM, Service Home, and tags.
2024.10.01
NEW MySQL(DBaaS) service official version release
  • MySQL(DBaaS) service has been released that allows easy creation and management of MariaDB in a web environment.

5 - Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)

5.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) is a representative relational database management system (RDBMS) used in various applications. Samsung Cloud Platform provides an environment that can automate the installation of Microsoft SQL Server through a web-based console and perform management functions for operation.

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) is designed with an Always On based availability architecture, and when the content of the Primary server changes, it is synchronously replicated to the Secondary server. Additionally, it provides an automatic backup function at user-specified times to prepare for issues with the DB server or data, supporting data recovery at the desired point in time.

Provided Features

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) provides the following features.

  • Auto Provisioning: Allows installation and configuration of Database (DB) via UI, provides a Primary-Secondary redundancy configuration built on Always On. In case of Primary server failure, it automatically fails over to Secondary.
  • Operation Control Management: Provides a function to control the status of running servers. In addition to start and stop, restart is possible if there is an issue with the DB or to apply configuration values. When configured for high availability (HA), the user can directly perform node switching between Primary-Secondary via Switch-over.
  • Backup and Recovery: Provides data backup functionality based on its own backup commands. Backup time windows, retention agencies, and full backup days can be set by the user, and additional fees may apply based on backup volume. It also provides a recovery function for backed-up data, creating a separate database when the user performs a recovery, and the recovery proceeds to the point in time selected by the user (backup storage point, user-specified point). When restoring to a user-specified point, the restore point can be set to 5 minutes/10 minutes/30 minutes/1 hour before the stored backup file and archive file.
  • Version Management: Provides version upgrade (Minor) functionality due to some feature improvements and security patches. Whether to perform backup for the version upgrade can be selected by the user, and if backup is performed, data is backed up before applying the patch, then the DB engine is updated.
  • Secondary configuration: You can additionally configure a read-only Read Replica (Secondary Replica), enabling read performance scaling and load balancing.
  • Audit setting: Provides an Audit setting feature that can monitor the user’s DB access and the results of DDL (Data Definition Language)/DML (Data Manipulation Language) execution.
  • Parameter Management: Performance improvement and security-related DB configuration parameter modifications are possible.
  • Service status query: Retrieves the final status of the current DB service.
  • Monitoring: CPU, Memory, DB performance monitoring information can be checked through the Cloud Monitoring service.
  • DB User Management: View and manage DB account (user) information registered in the DB.
  • DB Log Export: Through Audit settings, you can export the stored logs to the user’s Object Storage.

Components

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) provides pre-validated engine versions and various server types. Users can select and use them according to the scale of the service they want to configure.

Engine Version

The engine versions supported by Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) are as follows.

Technical support can be used until the supplier’s EoTS (End of Technical Service) date, and the EOS date when new creation is stopped is set to six months before the EoTS date.

According to the supplier’s policy, the EOS and EoTS dates may change, so please refer to the supplier’s license management policy page for details.

Provided versionEOS Date(Samsung Cloud Platform New creation stop date)EoTS Date(Community Technical support end date)
Microsoft SQL Server 2019 Enterprise2029-06 (Planned)2030-01-08(Extended Support)
2025-02-28(Standard Support)
Microsoft SQL Server 2019 Standard2029-06 (planned)2030-01-08(Extended Support)
2025-02-28(Standard Support)
Microsoft SQL Server 2022 Enterprise2032-06 (planned)2033-01-11(Extended Support)
2028-01-11(Standard Support)
Microsoft SQL Server 2022 Standard2032-06 (planned)2033-01-11(Extended Support)
2028-01-11(Standard Support)
Table. Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) Engine Versions Provided

Server Type

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) supported server types are as follows.

For detailed information about the server types provided by Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS), refer to Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Server Type.

Standard db1v2m4
CategoryExampleDetailed description
Server TypeStandardProvided Server Types
  • Standard: Standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) configuration commonly used
  • High Capacity: Large server specifications of 24 vCores or more
Server specificationsdb1Provided server specifications
  • db1: Standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) configuration commonly used
  • dbh2: Large-scale server specifications
    • Provides servers with 24 vCores or more
Server specificationsv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server specificationsm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) server type components

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service for details and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an independent virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Preliminary Service

5.1.1 - Server Type

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) server type

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) provides a server type composed of various combinations such as CPU, Memory, Network Bandwidth, etc. When creating Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS), the Database Engine is installed according to the server type selected for the purpose of use.

The server types supported by Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) are as follows.

Standard db1v2m4
Classification
ExampleDetailed Description
Server TypeStandardProvided server type distinction
  • Standard: Composed of standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) commonly used
  • High Capacity: Server specifications with high capacity over Standard
Server Specificationsdb1Classification of provided server type and generation
  • db1: means general specifications, and 1 means generation
  • dbh2: h means large-capacity server specifications, and 2 means generation
Server Specificationv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server Specificationm4Memory Capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) server type format

db1 server type

The db1 server type of Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) is provided with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various database workloads.

  • Up to 3.3Ghz Intel 3rd generation (Ice Lake) Xeon Gold 6342 Processor
  • Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory
  • Up to 12.5 Gbps networking speed
ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
Standarddb1v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v2m322 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m126 vCore12 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m246 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m486 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m168 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m328 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m648 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m968 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v8m1288 vCore128 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m2010 vCore20 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m4010 vCore40 GBup to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m8010 vCore80 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m12010 vCore120 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m2412 vCore24 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m4812 vCore48 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m9612 vCore96 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m14412 vCore144 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v12m19212 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m2814 vCore28 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m5614 vCore56 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m11214 vCore112 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m16814 vCore168 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m3216 vCore32 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m6416 vCore64 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m12816 vCore128 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m19216 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb1v16m25616 vCore256 GBup to 12.5 Gbps
Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) server type specifications - db1 server type

DB2 server type

The db2 server type of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) is provided with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various database workloads.

  • Up to 3.2GHz Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Xeon Gold 6448H Processor
  • Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory
  • Up to 12.5 Gbps networking speed
ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
Standarddb2v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v2m322 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v6m126 vCore12 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v6m246 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v6m486 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v8m168 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v8m328 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v8m648 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v8m968 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v8m1288 vCore128 GBup to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v10m2010 vCore20 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v10m4010 vCore40 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v10m8010 vCore80 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v10m12010 vCore120 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standarddb2v12m2412 vCore24 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v12m4812 vCore48 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v12m9612 vCore96 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v12m14412 vCore144 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v12m19212 vCore192 GBup to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v14m2814 vCore28 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v14m5614 vCore56 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v14m11214 vCore112 GBup to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v14m16814 vCore168 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v16m3216 vCore32 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v16m6416 vCore64 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v16m12816 vCore128 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v16m19216 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standarddb2v16m25616 vCore256 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) server type specifications - db2 server type

DBH2 Server Type

The dbh2 server type of Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) is provided with large-capacity server specifications and is suitable for database workloads for large-scale data processing.

  • Up to 3.2GHz Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Xeon Gold 6448H Processor
  • Supports up to 128 vCPUs and 1,536 GB of memory
  • up to 25Gbps of networking speed
ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
High Capacitydbh2v24m4824 vCore48 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m9624 vCore96 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m19224 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v24m28824 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m6432 vCore64 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m12832 vCore128 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m25632 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v32m38432 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m19248 vCore192 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v48m57648 vCore576 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m25664 vCore256 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v64m76864 vCore768 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m28872 vCore288 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v72m86472 vCore864 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m38496 vCore384 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v96m115296 vCore1152 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m512128 vCore512 GBUp to 25 Gbps
High Capacitydbh2v128m1536128 vCore1536 GBUp to 25 Gbps
Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) server type specifications - dbh2 server type

5.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

The following table shows the performance monitoring metrics of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) that can be checked through Cloud Monitoring. For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, please refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

For server monitoring metrics of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS), please refer to the Virtual Server monitoring metrics guide.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnit
Active LocksNumber of Active Lockscnt
Active SessionsNumber of Active Sessionscnt
Active Transactions [Total]Number of active transactionscnt
Blocking Session IDLong-running query (slow query)ID
Connected UsersNumber of users connected to the systemcnt
Datavolume Size [Free]Available spacebytes
DBFiles [Not Online]Query to check if all data files are ONLINEcnt
Instance State [Cluster]State when configuring MSSQL clusterstate
Instance State [PID]sqlservr.exe process pidPID
Lock Processes [Blocked]Number of SQL processes blocked by other processescnt
Lock Waits [Per Second]Average number of lock waits per secondcnt
Page IO Latch Wait TimeAverage wait time for Page IO latch waitsms
SlowqueriesLong-running query (slow query)cnt
Slowquery CPU TimeLong-running query (slow query)ms
Slowquery Execute Context IDLong-running query (slow query)ID
Slowquery Memory UsageLong-running query (slow query)bytes
Slowquery Session IDLong-running query (slow query)ID
Slowquery Wait Duration TimeLong-running query (slow query)ms
Tablespace UsedDatavolume sizebytes
Transaction Time [MAX]Long-running transactioncnt
Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

5.2 - How-to guides

The user can enter the required information for Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, select detailed options, and create the service.

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Create

You can create and use the Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Notice

Before creating the service, please configure the VPC’s Subnet type as General.

  • If the Subnet type is Local, the creation of the corresponding Database service is not possible.

To create Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS), follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Create button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Create page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Creation On the page, enter the information required to create the service, and select detailed options.
    • Image and version selection Select the required information in the area.
      Category
      Required or not
      Detailed description
      Image VersionRequiredProvide version list of Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS)
      Table. Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) Image and version selection items
    • Service Information Input Enter or select the required information in the area.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      Server Name PrefixRequiredServer name where DB will be installed
      • Start with a lowercase English letter, and use lowercase letters, numbers, and the special character (-) to input 3 to 13 characters
      • Based on the server name, a postfix such as 001, 002 is attached to create the actual server name
      Cluster NameRequiredCluster name composed of DB servers
      • Enter using English letters, 3 to 20 characters
      • A cluster is a unit that groups multiple servers
      Service Type > Server TypeRequiredServer type where DB will be installed
      • Standard: Standard specifications commonly used
      • High Capacity: Large-capacity server with 24 vCore or more
      Service Type > Planned ComputeSelectStatus of resources with Planned Compute set
      • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute set that are currently in use
      • Configured: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
      • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by Planned Compute per resource
      • Create Planned Compute Service: Go to the Planned Compute service application page
      Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage settings used by DB according to purpose
      • Basic OS: Area where the DB engine is installed
      • DATA: Storage area for table data, archive files, etc.
        • Select the storage type and then enter the capacity (refer to Block Storage Creation for details on each Block Storage type)
          • SSD: High-performance general volume
          • HDD: General volume
          • SSD_KMS, HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volumes using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management System) encryption keys
          • The configured storage type is applied identically to additional storage
          • Capacity must be entered as a multiple of 8 within the range 16 ~ 5,120
          Additional: Data storage area
          • After selecting Use, enter the storage’s purpose and capacity
          Click the + button to add storage, and the x button to delete
        • Capacity can be entered as a multiple of 8 within the range 16 ~ 5,120, and up to 9 can be created
      Redundancy ConfigurationSelectRedundancy Configuration Status
      • If redundancy configuration is used, the DB instance is configured as Active DB and Standby DB
      Network > Common SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers generated by the service are installed
      • Select if you want to apply the same settings to all servers being installed
      • Select a pre‑created VPC, Subnet, IP, and Public NAT
        • IP can only be auto‑generated
        • The Public NAT feature is available only when the VPC is connected to an Internet Gateway. If you check Use, you can select from reserved IPs in the VPC product’s Public IP. For more information, see Create Public IP
      Network > Server-specific SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers generated by the service are deployed
      • Select if you want to apply different settings per installed server
      • Select a pre‑created VPC, Subnet, IP, and Public NAT
        • Enter each server’s IP
        • The Public NAT feature is available only when the VPC is connected to an Internet Gateway. If Use is checked, you can select from reserved IPs in the VPC product’s Public IP. For more information, see Create Public IP.
      IP Access ControlSelectService Access Policy Settings
      • Since the access policy is set for the IP entered on the page, a separate Security Group policy setting is not required
      • Enter in IP format (e.g., 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32) and click the Add button
      • To delete an entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
      Maintenance PeriodSelectDB Maintenance Period
      • Use to set day of week, start time, and duration
      • It is recommended to set a maintenance period for stable DB management. Patch work will be performed at the set time, causing service interruption.
      • If set to not use, Samsung SDS is not responsible for issues arising from patches not being applied.
      Table. Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) Service Configuration Items
    • Database configuration required information input Enter or select the required information in the area.
      Category
      Required or not
      Detailed description
      Database Service NameRequiredDatabase Management Unit Name
      • Start with an uppercase English letter and use English characters, input 1~15
      Database name > DefaultRequiredServer name applied when installing DB
      • Starts with an English letter, and using English letters, numbers, and special characters (.,_) input 3 ~ 20 characters
      Database name > AddRequiredServer name applied when installing DB
      • Select Use, then enter the name of the Database to install. It must start with an English letter, and be entered using English letters, numbers, and special characters (., _) for 3 - 20 characters
      • For each Database, the drive where data is stored can be selected from the drives added in Service Type > Block Storage
      • Adding Databases is only possible in the Enterprise version, up to a maximum of 100
      Database usernameRequiredDB user name
      • An account with the same name is also created on the OS
      • Enter using lowercase English letters, 2 to 20 characters
      • The following names cannot be used as a Database username
        • root, user, sdscmpif, hacluster, adm, games, nobody, sshd, system, mail, postfix, sa, maxigent_cl
      Database passwordRequiredDB connection password
      • Enter 8-30 characters including letters, numbers, and special characters ( excluded)
      Database password verificationRequiredDB connection password verification
      • Re-enter the DB connection password identically
      Database Port numberRequiredDB connection port number
      • Enter DB port within the range 1200 - 65535
      LicenseRequiredSQL Server License Key
      • Enter the issued license key
      • If the entered license key is not valid, the service may not be created
      Backup > UseSelectBackup usage status
      • Use select to set backup file retention period, backup start time, Full backup schedule (day of week), Archive backup cycle
      Backup > Retention PeriodSelectBackup Retention Period
      • Select the backup retention period. File retention period can be set from 7 days to 35 days.
      • Backup files incur additional charges based on size.
      Backup > Backup Start PeriodSelectBackup Start Time
      • Select backup start time
      • The minutes during which the backup is performed are set randomly, and the backup end time cannot be set
      Backup > Full Backup Schedule(Day of Week)SelectFull Backup Schedule
      • Select the day of week for Full backup execution
      • Full backup is performed every week
      Backup > Archive backup frequencySelectArchive backup frequency
      • Select the Archive backup frequency
      • Archive backup frequency is recommended at 1 hour. Selecting 5 minutes, 10 minutes, or 30 minutes may affect DB performance
      Audit Log SettingsSelectWhether to save Audit Log
      • Select Use to configure the Audit Log feature
      • DDL and user connection information records are saved
      • Enabling Audit may degrade DB performance
      ParameterRequiredDB configuration parameters
      • Search button can be clicked to view detailed information of the parameter
      • Parameters can be modified after the service creation is completed, and a DB restart is required after modification
      DB CollationSelectData sorting method
      • A command that specifies the data sorting and comparison method, and the result of the operation may differ depending on the setting.
      Time zoneRequiredStandard time zone to be used by the Database
      Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Database configuration items
  • Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
    Category
    Required or not
    Detailed description
    TagSelectAdd Tag
    • Up to 50 can be added per resource
    • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
    Table. Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) Additional Information Input Items
  1. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Generate button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Check detailed information

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Details page consists of Details, Tags, Operation History tabs, and for databases with a configured Replica, a Replica Information tab is additionally provided.

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) To view detailed information, follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List Click the resource to view detailed information on the page. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Details It navigates to the page.
  • Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Details At the top of the page, status information and information about additional features are displayed.
    CategoryDetailed description
    Cluster StatusCluster status with DB installed
    • Creating: Cluster is being created
    • Editing: Cluster is changing to operation execution state
    • Error: Cluster encountered a failure while performing tasks
      • If it occurs continuously, contact the administrator
    • Failed: Cluster failed during creation
    • Restarting: Cluster is being restarted
    • Running: Cluster is operating normally
    • Starting: Cluster is being started
    • Stopped: Cluster is stopped
    • Stopping: Cluster is being stopped
    • Synchronizing: Cluster is being synchronized
    • Terminating: Cluster is being deleted
    • Unknown: Cluster status is unknown
      • If it occurs continuously, contact the administrator
    • Upgrading: Cluster is changing to upgrade execution state
    Cluster ControlButton to change cluster state
    • Start: Start a stopped cluster
    • Stop: Stop a running cluster
    • Restart: Restart a running cluster
    • Switch-Over: Switch a standby cluster to Active
    More additional featuresCluster-related management button
    • Service status synchronization: Query real-time DB service status
    • Backup history: If backup is configured, check whether backup runs correctly and view history
    • Database recovery: Recover DB based on a specific point in time
    • Parameter management: View and modify DB configuration parameters
    • Add secondary: Configure a read-only cluster Replica
    • DB user management: View and manage DB accounts (users) registered in the DB
    • Export DB Log: Logs stored via Audit settings can be exported to the user’s Object Storage
    Service terminationButton to cancel the service
    Table. Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) status information and additional features

Detailed Information

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List On the page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.

CategoryDetailed description
Server InformationServer information configured in the respective cluster
  • Category: Server type (Primary, Secondary)
  • Server name: Server name
  • IP:Port: Server IP and port
  • Status: Server status
ServiceService Name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In DB service, it means cluster SRN
ResourceResource Name
  • In DB service, it means the cluster name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation Date/TimeService creation date/time
EditorUser who modified the service information
Modification DateDate and time when service information was modified
Image VersionInstalled DB Image and Version Information
  • If a version upgrade is needed, click the Edit icon to set
Cluster NameName of the cluster where the servers are configured
Databse service nameDatabase management unit name
Database usernameDB user name
Database name > default DatabaseServer name applied when installing DB
Database name > Add DatabaseServer name applied when installing DB
  • When adding a Database, click the **Add** button to add. Refer to [Add Database](/userguide/database/mssql/how_to_guides/managing.md#database-추가하기)
  • If you want to delete an added Database, click the **Edit** icon to add. Refer to [Delete Database](/userguide/database/mssql/how_to_guides/managing.md#database-삭제하기)
| | Planned Compute | Resource status with Planned Compute set
  • For more details, refer to [Planned Compute Apply](/userguide/financial_management/planned_compute/how_to_guides/)
| | Maintenance Period | DB Maintenance Period Status
  • If maintenance period setting is required, click the **Edit** icon to set
| | Backup | Backup configuration status
  • If backup configuration is needed, **Edit** icon to set
  • For details, refer to [Microsoft SQL Server(DBaas) Backup](/userguide/database/mssql/how_to_guides/backupandrestore.md#microsoft-sql-serverdbaas-백업하기)
| | Audit Log Settings | Audit Log Settings Status
  • If Audit Log settings are needed, click the **Edit** icon to configure
  • For details, refer to [Edit Audit Settings](/userguide/database/mssql/how_to_guides/managing.md#audit-설정-수정하기)
| | Time zone | Standard time zone used by the Database | | DB Collation | Data Sorting Method | | VIP | Virtual IP information
  • Can be checked only when high availability is configured
| | Network | Network information where DB is installed (VPC, Subnet) | | IP Access Control | Service Access Policy Settings
  • If you need to add or delete an IP, click the **Edit** icon to set
| | Primary & Secondary | Primary/Secondary server type, default OS, additional Disk information
  • If you need to modify the server type, click the **Edit** icon next to the server type to set it. Refer to [Change Server Type](#서버-타입-변경하기) for the server type modification procedure
    • Modifying the server type requires a server reboot
  • If you need to expand storage, click the **Edit** icon next to the storage capacity to expand. Refer to [Expand Storage](#스토리지-증설하기) for the storage expansion procedure
  • If you need to add storage, click the **Add Disk** button next to Additional Disk to add. Refer to [Add Storage](#스토리지-추가하기) for the storage addition procedure
|
Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Database detailed information items

Tag

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag ListTag List
  • Can check the tag’s Key and Value information
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from the existing list of Keys and Values
Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Tag Tab Items

Work History

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Work History ListResource Change History
  • Work date/time, Resource ID, Resource name, Work details, Event topic, Work result, Verify worker information
Table. Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) Job History Tab Detailed Information Items

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Managing Resources

If you need to change the existing configuration options of a created Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) resource, or recover it, or manage parameters, you can perform the work on the Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) Details page.

Operating Control

If changes occur to a running Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) resource, you can start, stop, or restart it. Also, if HA is configured, you can switch the Primary-Secondary servers via a switch-over.

To control the operation of Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS), follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to control operation. It moves to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Check the status and complete the change using the control button below.
    • Start: The server where the DB service is installed and the DB service is running.
    • Stop: The server where the DB service is installed and the DB service are stopped (Stopped).
    • Restart: Only the DB service will be restarted.
    • Switch Over: You can switch the DB’s Primary server and Secondary server.

Synchronize Service Status

You can synchronize the real-time service status of Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS).

To check the service status of Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS), follow the steps below.

  1. All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Click the resource to view the service status on the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page. It moves to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Service Status Synchronization Click the button. While it is being queried, the cluster will change to Synchronizing state.
  5. When the query is completed, the status is updated in the server information item, and the cluster changes to Running status.

Change Server Type

You can change the configured server type.

To change the server type, follow the steps below.

Caution
  • If you modify the server type, a server restart is required. Please separately verify any SW license changes or SW settings and reflections due to server specification changes.
  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. Go to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. Go to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List Click the resource to change the server type on the page. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail Navigate to the page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of the server type you want to change at the bottom of the detailed information. Server Type Edit popup window opens.
  5. Edit Server Type In the popup window, after selecting the server type, click the Confirm button.

Add Storage

If you need more than 5 TB of data storage space, you can add storage. In the case of a redundant DB configuration, all redundant servers are added simultaneously.

To add storage capacity, follow the steps below.

Caution
  • It is applied the same as the selected Storage type when creating a service.
  • For a high‑availability configured DB, adding storage is applied simultaneously to the storage of the Primary DB and the Secondary DB.
  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. Go to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to add storage. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Details page will be opened.
  4. Click the Add Disk button at the bottom of the detailed information. The Add Storage Request popup window opens.
  5. Additional Storage Request In the popup window, after entering the purpose and capacity, click the Confirm button.

Expanding storage

You can expand the storage added to the data area up to a maximum of 5 TB based on the initially allocated capacity. In the case of a redundant DB configuration, all redundant servers are expanded simultaneously.

To increase storage capacity, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. Go to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List Click the resource to change the server type on the page. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Details Navigate to the page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of the additional Disk you want to add at the bottom of the detailed information. The Edit Additional Storage popup window opens.
  5. Add Storage Modification After entering the expansion capacity in the popup window, click the Confirm button.

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Cancel

You can cancel unused Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) to reduce operating costs. However, if you cancel the service, the running service may be stopped immediately, so you should consider the impact of service interruption sufficiently before proceeding with the cancellation.

Caution
If you terminate the DB, all stored data and any backup data will be deleted.

To cancel Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS), follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. Go to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu on the Service Home page. Navigate to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, select the resource to cancel, and click the Cancel Service button.
  4. Once the termination is complete, check whether the resource has been terminated on the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page.

5.2.1 - Managing DB Service

Users can manage Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Managing Database

For Microsoft SQL Server Enterprise version, you can add new Databases. You can add up to 100 per cluster.

Adding Database

Follow these steps to add Database.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to add storage. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Add button in the Database name item. The Add Database popup window will open.
  5. In the Add Database popup window, click the + button to enter Database name and select drive, then click the Confirm button.

Deleting Database

Follow these steps to delete Database.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to add storage. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Modify button in the Database name item. The Delete Added Database popup window will open.
  5. In the Delete Added Database Request popup window, check the Database to delete and click the Delete button. The Delete Database popup window will open.
  6. In the Delete Database popup window, enter the Database name to delete and then click the Confirm button.

Managing Parameters

Provides functionality to easily view and modify database configuration parameters.

Viewing Parameters

Follow these steps to view configuration parameters.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to view and modify parameters. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Parameter Management button. The Parameter Management popup window will open.
  5. In the Parameter Management popup window, click the View button. The View Notification popup window will open.
  6. When the View Notification popup window opens, click the Confirm button. Viewing may take some time.

Modifying Parameters

Follow these steps to modify configuration parameters.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to view and modify parameters. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Parameter Management button. The Parameter Management popup window will open.
  5. In the Parameter Management popup window, click the View button. The View Notification popup window will open.
  6. When the View Notification popup window opens, click the Confirm button. Viewing may take some time.
  7. If modification is needed, click the Modify button and enter the modification in the custom value area of the Parameter to be modified.
  8. When input is complete, click the Complete button.

Managing DB Users

Provides functionality to view and manage DB user information.

Viewing DB Users

Follow these steps to view DB users.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to view DB users. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB User Management button. You will move to the DB User Management page.
  5. On the DB User Management page, click the View button. Viewing may take some time.

Changing DB User Status

Follow these steps to change the status of viewed DB users.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to modify DB users. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB User Management button. You will move to the DB User Management page.
  5. On the DB User Management page, click the View button. Viewing may take some time.
  6. If modification is needed, click the Modify button and change the status area value or enter remarks.
  7. When input is complete, click the Complete button.

Modifying Audit Settings

You can change the Audit log storage settings for Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).

Follow these steps to change the Audit log storage settings for Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to view the service status. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Modify icon in Audit Settings at the bottom of the detailed information. The Modify Audit Settings popup window will open.
  5. In the Modify Audit Settings popup window, modify the usage and then click the Confirm button.
    • Selecting Use sets the Audit log function. Setting Audit logs may degrade DB performance.
    • Disabling Use deletes the Audit log storage file. Please back up the Audit log file separately before disabling use.

Exporting DB Log

Supports exporting audit(Audit) log data that requires long-term retention to Object Storage. Users can directly set the log type to be saved, the destination Bucket to export to, and the cycle for exporting logs. Logs are copied and stored to the specified Object Storage according to the set criteria. Additionally, to efficiently manage disk space, provides an option to automatically delete original log files while exporting logs to Object Storage. Using this option allows you to effectively secure storage capacity while safely storing necessary log data for long-term retention.

Notice
  • To use the DB Log Export function, Object Storage creation is required. For Object Storage creation, please refer to the Object Storage User Guide.
  • Please check the expiration date of the authentication key. If the authentication key expires, logs will not be saved to the Bucket.
  • Please be careful not to expose authentication key information externally.

Setting DB Log Export Mode

Follow these steps to set DB Log export mode.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to export DB Log. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Log Export button. You will move to the DB Log Export page.
  5. On the DB Log Export page, click the Register button. You will move to the Register DB Log Export page.
  6. On the Register DB Log Export page, enter the corresponding information and then click the Complete button.
    CategoryRequired
    Detailed Description
    Log TypeRequiredLog type to save
    Storage Bucket NameRequiredObject Storage Bucket name to save
    Authentication Key > Access keyRequiredAccess key to access the Object Storage to save
    Authentication Key > Secret keyRequiredSecret key to access the Object Storage to save
    File Creation CycleRequiredCycle for creating files in Object Storage
    Delete Original LogOptionalWhether to delete original logs while exporting to Object Storage
    Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) DB Log Export Configuration Items

Managing DB Log Export

Follow these steps to modify, cancel, or immediately export DB Log export settings.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource for which you want to manage DB Log export. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the More button and click the DB Log Export button. You will move to the DB Log Export page.
  5. On the DB Log Export page, click the More button according to the log type you want to manage and click the Immediate Export, Modify, or Cancel button.
    • Immediate Export: The selected log is exported to the Bucket of the previously set Object Storage.
    • Modify: Modifies the DB Log export mode settings.
    • Cancel: Cancels the DB Log export mode settings.

Upgrading Minor Version

Provides version upgrade functionality for some feature improvements and security patches. Only Minor version upgrades within the same Major version are supported.

Caution
  • Please check the service status first through service status synchronization before performing version upgrade.
  • Please proceed with version upgrade after setting up backup. If backup is not set, some data may not be recoverable when problems occur during upgrade.
  • Backed up data is automatically deleted after version upgrade is complete.

Follow these steps to upgrade Minor Version.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to upgrade the version. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Modify button in the Image version item. The Version Upgrade popup window will open.
  5. In the Version Upgrade popup window, select the modified version and backup setting, then click the Confirm button.
  6. In the Version Upgrade Notification popup window, click the Confirm button.

5.2.2 - DB Backup and Recovery

The user can set up a backup of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and restore it with the backed-up file.

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) backup

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) provides a data backup feature based on its own backup command, and also provides an optimized backup environment for data protection and management through backup history checking and backup file deletion functions.

Setting up backup

The method for configuring a backup for Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) is described in the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) creation guide; please refer to it.

To modify the backup settings of the generated resource, follow these steps.

Caution

If backup is set, backup is performed at the specified time after the set time, and additional fees are incurred depending on the backup capacity.

  • If the backup setting is changed to unset, the backup operation will be stopped immediately, and the saved backup data will be deleted and can no longer be used.
  1. All services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu, click. It moves to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page.
  3. Click the resource to set up backup on the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page. It moves to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) details page.
  4. Click the Edit button of the backup item. The Backup Settings popup window opens.
  5. If you set up a backup, click Use in the Backup Settings popup window, select the retention period, backup start time, and Archive backup cycle, and then click the OK button.
    • If you want to stop the backup setting, uncheck Use in the Backup Settings popup window and click the OK button.

Check Backup History

Notice
To set up notifications for backup success and failure, you can set them up through the Notification Manager product. For a detailed usage guide on setting up notification policies, please refer to Creating a Notification Policy.

To view the backup history, follow these steps.

  1. Click All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page, click the resource to check the backup history. It moves to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) details page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup window opens.
  5. Backup History popup window where you can check the backup status, version, backup start time, backup completion time, and capacity.

Deleting backup files

To delete the backup history, follow these steps.

Caution
Backup files cannot be restored after deletion. Please make sure to check if the data is unnecessary before deleting it.
  1. Click All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page, click the resource to check the backup history. It moves to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) details page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup window opens.
  5. Backup History popup window, check the file you want to delete, and then click the Delete button.

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Recovery

In the event of a disability or data loss that requires restoration with a backup file, recovery is possible based on a specific point in time through the recovery function. When performing Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) recovery, a new server is created with the OS image at the initial provisioning time, and the DB is installed with the version at the backup point, and the recovery proceeds with the DB configuration information and data.

To restore Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS), follow these procedures.

  1. Click All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. Move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) resource list page, click the resource you want to restore. Move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) details page.
  4. Click the Database Recovery button. Go to the Database Recovery page.
  5. Database Recovery Configuration area, enter the corresponding information and click the Complete button.
Classification
Necessity
Detailed Description
Recovery TypeRequiredSet the point in time to recover
  • Backup Point (Recommended): Recover based on the backup file. Select from the list of backup file timestamps displayed in the list
  • Custom Point: Recover to the desired point in time within the range where backup is possible. The recoverable period is from the initial backup start time to 1 hour/30 minutes/10 minutes/5 minutes before the current time, based on the Archive backup cycle setting value. Select the date and time you want to back up
Server name prefixRequiredRecovery DB server name
  • Start with lowercase English letters, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-) to input 3-16 characters
  • A postfix such as 001, 002 is attached based on the server name, and the actual server name is created
Cluster NameRequiredRecovery DB Cluster Name
  • Enter in English, 3-20 characters
  • A cluster is a unit that bundles multiple servers
Service Type > Server TypeRequiredRecovery DB Server Type
  • Standard: Generally used standard specification
  • High Capacity: High-capacity server with 24vCore or more
Service Type > Planned ComputeSelectionCurrent status of resources with Planned Compute set
  • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute set that are in use
  • Setting: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
  • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by resource-based Planned Compute
  • Create Planned Compute Service: Move to the Planned Compute service application page
Service Type > Block StorageRequiredRecovery DB uses Block Storage settings
  • Basic OS: Area where the DB engine is installed
  • DATA: Data storage area
    • The storage type set in the original cluster is applied in the same way
    • Capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 in the range of 16 to 5,120
  • Additional: Data storage area
    • The storage type set in the original cluster is applied in the same way
    • Only DATA and TEMP purposes can be added in the recovery DB
    • Select Use and enter the purpose and capacity of the storage
    • To add storage, click the + button, and to delete, click the x button
    • Capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 in the range of 16 to 5,120, and up to 9 can be created
Database usernamerequiredDatabase username
  • Applied identically to the username set in the original cluster
Database Port numberrequiredDatabase Port number
  • Apply the same port number set in the original cluster
IP Access ControlSelectSet service access policy
  • Set access policy for IP entered on the page, so Security Group policy setting is not required separately
  • Enter in IP format (e.g., 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32) and click the Add button
  • To delete the entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
Maintenance periodSelectDB maintenance period
  • Use is selected, set the day of the week, start time, and duration
  • It is recommended to set the maintenance period for stable management of the DB. Patch work is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
  • If not used, Samsung SDS is not responsible for the problems that occur due to non-application of patches.
TagSelectAdd Tag
  • Click the Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value
Fig. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Recovery Configuration Items

5.2.3 - Adding Secondary

Users can enter required information for Secondary through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and create the service through detailed options.

Adding Secondary

Through Secondary configuration, you can create read-only replica servers. To configure Secondary additionally, it must be created with HA (High Availability) and Enterprise Edition, and the backup function must be enabled.

Follow these steps to configure Secondary.

  1. Click the All Services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)’s Service Home page.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) menu. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to configure Secondary. You will move to the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Detail page.
  4. Click the Add Secondary button. You will move to the Add Secondary page.
  5. Enter information in the Secondary Configuration area and then click the Create button.
    Category
    Required
    Detailed Description
    Secondary CountRequiredNumber of Secondaries to configure
    • Can configure only 1 per cluster
    Secondary NameRequiredSecondary server name
    • Enter 3 ~ 15 characters starting with lowercase English letters, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters(-)
    • The entered Secondary name is displayed as cluster name in the list
    Service Type > Server TypeRequiredSecondary server type
    • Applied identically according to the server type set in the original DB
    Service Type > Planned ComputeOptionalStatus of resources with Planned Compute set
    • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute set that are currently in use
    • Set: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
    • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by Planned Compute per resource
    Network > Common SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in the service are installed
    • Applied identically with network settings set in original DB
    Network > Per-Server SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in the service are installed
    • Select when applying different settings for each server being installed
    • Applied identically with network settings set in original DB
    • When setting per server, enter IP address within 10.10.10.0/24 range
    LicenseRequiredSQL Server License Key
    • Enter the issued license key
    • If the entered license key is invalid, the service may not be created
    Table. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Secondary Configuration Items

5.2.4 - Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) server connection

Scenario Overview

The Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) server connection scenario is a scenario where a Bastion host (Virtual Server) and a Database service are created, and the DB service is accessed through the Bastion host. To securely access Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) in the Samsung Cloud Platform environment, it is necessary to create a Bastion host and use it for network connection. To maintain a stable and high level of security, it is recommended to configure the Database service in a Private Subnet environment and configure the Bastion host in a limited Public Subnet environment.

This scenario largely describes the process of creating a Bastion host and Database service, and configuring the network environment for Bastion host and Database connection, and accessing it through a DB connection client.

Architecture
Figure. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) server connection architecture

Scenario Components

You can configure the scenario using the following services.

Service Group
Service
Detailed Description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an independent virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingVPC > SubnetA service that allows users to subdivide the network into smaller segments according to purpose/size within the VPC
NetworkingVPC > Public IPA service that reserves public IP and assigns and returns it to Compute resources
NetworkingVPC > Internet GatewayA service that connects VPC resources to the internet
NetworkingSecurity GroupA virtual firewall that controls the server’s traffic
DatabaseMicrosoft SQL Server(DBaaS)A service that easily creates and manages Microsoft SQL Server in a web environment
ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
ComputeVirtual Server > KeypairEncryption file used to connect to the Virtual Server
Table. Scenario Component List
Note
  • The default policy of Security Group is Deny All, so only allowed IPs must be registered.
  • In/Outbound’s All Open(Any IP, Any Port) policy can expose cloud resources to external threats.
    • By specifying the necessary IP and Port to set the policy, you can enhance security.

Scenario composition method

To configure the scenario, create the necessary services through the following procedure.

1. Configuring the Network

This describes the process of configuring the network environment for connecting to the Bastion Host and Database services.

1-1. Creating a VPC

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC button. It moves to the Create VPC page.
  3. VPC Creation page, please enter the information required for service creation.
    • IP range should be entered as 192.168.x.0/16.
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the resource you created on the VPC list page.

1-2. Creating a Subnet

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Subnet guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Service Home page, click the Subnet menu. It moves to the Subnet list page.
  3. Click the Subnet Creation button. It moves to the Subnet Creation page.
  4. Subnet Creation page where you enter the information needed to create a service.
    • Subnet type should be selected as General.
    • Please select a pre-created VPC.
    • IP range should be entered as 192.168.x.0/24.
  5. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Subnet list page.

1-3. Creating an Internet Gateway

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Internet Gateway guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. It moves to the Internet Gateway list page.
  3. Click the Create Internet Gateway button. It moves to the Create Internet Gateway page.
  4. Internet Gateway Creation page, please enter the required information necessary for service creation.
    • Please select a pre-created VPC.
    • Select Use in the Firewall usage item.
  5. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and then click the Complete button.
    • Once the creation is complete, check the created resource on the Internet Gateway list page.

1-4. Creating a Public IP

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Public IP guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Service Home page, click the Public IP menu. It moves to the Public IP list page.
  3. Public IP Reservation button, click. Move to the Public IP Reservation page.
  4. Public IP Reservation page where you enter the required information necessary for service reservation.
  5. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated billing amount, and click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Public IP list page.

1-5. Creating a Security Group

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > Security Group menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Security Group.
  2. Service Home page, click the Create Security Group button. Move to the Create Security Group page.
  3. Security Group Creation page, please enter the required information necessary for service creation.
  4. Check the input information and click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Security Group list page

2. Creating a Bastion host

This describes the process of configuring the Bastion Host where the database connection client should be installed.

2-1. Creating Server Keypair

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides > Keypair guide.
  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Service Home page, click the Keypair menu. It moves to the Keypair list page.
  3. Create Keypair button will be clicked. It moves to the Create Keypair page.
  4. Keypair creation page where you enter the required information necessary for service creation.
  5. Check the creation information and click the Complete button.
    • The key can only be downloaded for the first time, and re-issuance is not provided.
    • Please make sure to store the downloaded key in a safe place.

2-2. Creating a Bastion Host

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Service Home page, click the Virtual Server creation button. Move to the Virtual Server creation page.
  3. Virtual Server Creation page, please enter the required information necessary for service creation.
  4. Summary panel, check the detailed information generated and the expected billing amount, and click the Complete button.
    • After creation is complete, check the created resource on the Virtual Server list page.

2-3. Check Bastion host connection ID and PW

  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. Move to the Virtual Server list page.
  3. Virtual Serve list page, click on the resource created in 2-2. Bastion host creation. It moves to the detailed information page of the corresponding resource.
  4. In the detailed information page, click the RDP password inquiry button in the Keypair name item. The RDP password inquiry pop-up window opens.
  5. RDP password inquiry popup window, attach the keypair file downloaded from 2-1. Server Keypair creation.
  6. After attaching, click the Password check button. The ID and password required to access the resource will be displayed.

3. Creating a Database

It describes the process of creating a Database service.

3-1. Creating Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) Service

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click on the menu for all services > Database > Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS). It moves to the Service Home page of Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) button. It moves to the Create Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) page.
  3. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) creation page, please enter the required information needed for service creation.
    • Select and connect to the pre-created VPC and Subnet.
    • Enter Database related creation information on the required information input screen.
    • Add the Bastion host IP in the IP access control item.
    • Database Port is 2866 by default, but users can also specify it.
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and then click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource from the Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) list page.

4. Setting Rules

This describes the process of setting rules for users to connect to the Bastion host and rules for the Bastion host to connect to the Database.

4-1. Security Group Add Security Rules

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Security Group.
  2. Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. Move to the Security Group list page.
  3. 1-5. Creating a Security Group Select the Security Group resource created from 1-5. Creating a Security Group. It moves to the detailed information page of the corresponding resource.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the detailed information page. It moves to the Rules tab.
  5. Rule tab where you click the Add Rule button. Move to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. In the Add Rule popup window, enter the rules below and click the OK button
DirectionRemoteDestination AddressProtocolPortDescription
InboundCIDRUser PC IPTCP3389 (RDP)Bastion connection PC → Bastion host
OutboundCIDRDB IPTCPDatabase Port (direct input)Bastion host → Database
Fig. Security Group security rules to be added

4-2. Adding IGW Firewall Rules

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > Firewall > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > Firewall menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Firewall.
  2. Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. It moves to the Firewall list page.
  3. Firewall list page, select the Internet Gateway resource name created in 1-3. Creating Internet Gateway. It moves to the detailed information page of the corresponding resource.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the detailed information page. It moves to the Rules tab.
  5. Rule tab, click the Add Rule button. Move to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. Add Rule In the popup window, enter the following rules and click the OK button.
Departure AddressDestination AddressProtocolPortActionDirectionDescription
Bastion connection PC IPBastion host IPTCP3389(RDP)AllowInboundUser PC → Bastion host
Table. Internet Gateway Firewall rules to be added

5. Connect to Database

This describes the process of a user accessing the Database through a DB connection client program.

This guide provides instructions on how to connect using SSMS (Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio). Since there are various database client programs and CLI utilities, you can also install and use the tools that are suitable for you.

5-1. Connect to the Bastion host

  1. Run Remote Desktop Connection in the Windows environment of the PC that wants to access the Bastion host, enter the NAT IP of the Bastion Host, and click the Connect button.
  2. When the remote desktop connection is successful, the User Credential Input Window opens. Enter the ID and Password confirmed in 2-3. Check Bastion host access ID and PW and click the Confirm button.

5-2. Install DB connection client program (SSMS) on Bastion host

  1. Go to the official Microsoft SQL Server page and download the SSMS program.
  2. Connect the hard drive of the user PC to upload the file to the Bastion host.
  3. Click the Details button for local devices and resources entries in the Local Resources tab of Remote Desktop Connection.
  4. Select the local disk where the file was downloaded to the drive and click the Confirm button.
  5. Download the file, copy it to the Bastion Host, and upload it, then click the SSMS (Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio) installation file to install it.

5-3. Using DB Connection Client Program (SSMS) to Connect to Database

  1. Run SSMS (Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio). The Connect to Server popup window will appear.
  2. Connect to Server popup window, enter the database server information created in 3-1. Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) service creation and click the Connect button.
    Required Input Element ItemsInput Value
    Server typeDatabase Engine
    Server nameDatabase server IP, Database Port (ex. 192.168.10.1,2866)
    AuthenticationSQL Server Authentication
    LoginDatabase username
    PasswordDatabase password
    EncryptionOptional
    DB Connection Client Program Input Items
  3. Once the connection is complete, the Database will be connected. After connection, you can try performing simple queries, etc.

5.3 - API Reference

API Reference

5.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

5.5 - Release Note

Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS)

2025.07.01
FEATURE User (Access Control) Management, DB Audit Log Export Function Added, Backup Notification Function Provided
2025.02.27
NEW Microsoft SQL Server(DBaaS) Service Official Version Release
  • A Microsoft SQL Server (DBaaS) service that allows you to easily create and manage Microsoft SQL Server in a web environment has been released.

6 - CacheStore(DBaaS)

6.1 - Overview

Service Overview

CacheStore(DBaaS) is a service that provides the in‑memory based data stores Redis OSS and Valkey. Samsung Cloud Platform provides an environment that can automate the installation of Redis OSS and Valkey through a web‑based console and perform management functions for operation.

CacheStore (DBaaS) provides a Sentinel architecture consisting of a Master server that performs read/write operations and read‑only Replica servers that replicate the Master data. Sentinel checks the status of DB servers where the engine is installed and automatically fails over the Replica servers to become the Master server if a failure occurs on the Master server. Additionally, it provides an automatic backup feature at user‑specified times to prepare for issues with the DB server or data, allowing data recovery based on the backup point.

Architecture
Figure. CacheStore(DBaaS) Architecture

Provided Features

CacheStore(DBaaS) provides the following features.

  • Auto Provisioning: It is possible to install and configure the Database (DB) via UI, and a redundant configuration with a Sentinel-based Single Master server and Replica server(s) (1 or 2) is possible.
  • Operation Control Function: Provides a function to control the status of running servers. In addition to start and stop, restart is possible if there is an issue with the DB or to apply configuration values. When configured for high availability (HA), you can switch Active-Standby servers via Switch-over.
  • Backup and Recovery: Provides a data backup function based on its own backup commands. The backup time window and storage agency can be set by the user, and additional fees are incurred based on backup size. It also provides a recovery function for backed-up data; when the user performs a recovery, a separate DB is created and the recovery proceeds to the point in time selected by the user.
  • Parameter management: It is possible to modify DB configuration parameters related to performance improvement and security.
  • Service Status Query: Retrieves the final status of the current DB service.
  • Monitoring: CPU, memory, DB performance monitoring information can be checked through the Cloud Monitoring service.
  • Minor version upgrade: Minor version upgrades can be performed within the same Major version to apply some feature improvements and security patches.

Components

CacheStore (DBaaS) provides pre-validated engine versions and various server types according to the open source support policy. Users can select and use them according to the scale of the service they want to configure.

Engine Version

The engine versions supported by CacheStore (DBaaS) are as follows.

Technical support can be used until the supplier’s EoTS (End of Technical Service) date, and the EOS date when new creation is stopped is set to 6 months before the EoTS date.

Since the dates for EOS and EoTS may vary according to the supplier’s policy, please refer to the supplier’s license management policy page for details.

ImageProvided VersionEoS DateEoTS Date
Redis OSS Sentinel7.2.112029-06 (planned)2029-12-31
valkey Sentinel8.1.4TBDTBD
Table. Engine versions provided by CacheStore (DBaaS)

Server Type

The server types supported by CacheStore (DBaaS) are as follows.

For detailed information about the server types provided by CacheStore(DBaaS), see CacheStore(DBaaS) Server Types.

Standard redis1v2m4
CategoryExampleDetailed description
Server TypeStandardProvided Server Type
  • Standard: Standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) configuration commonly used
Server Specificationsredis1Provided Server Specifications
  • redis1: Standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) configuration commonly used
Server Specificationsv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server Specificationsm4Memory Capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Table. CacheStore (DBaaS) Server Type Components

Preliminary Service

This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service for detailed information and prepare in advance.

Service CategoryServiceDetailed Description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an independent virtual network in a cloud environment
Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Prior Service

6.1.1 - Server Type

CacheStore(DBaaS) server type

CacheStore(DBaaS) provides a server type composed of various combinations such as CPU, Memory, Network Bandwidth, etc. When creating CacheStore(DBaaS), Redis is installed according to the selected server type suitable for the purpose of use.

The server types supported by CacheStore(DBaaS) are as follows.

Standard redis1v2m4
Classification
ExampleDetailed Description
Server TypeStandardProvided server type distinction
  • Standard: Configured with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) commonly used
Server Specificationredis1Provided server type distinction and generation
  • redis: means general specification, and 1 means generation
Server specificationsv2Number of vCores
  • v2: 2 virtual cores
Server specificationm4Memory capacity
  • m4: 4GB Memory
Fig. CacheStore(DBaaS) server type format

redis1 server type

The redis1 server type of CacheStore(DBaaS) is provided with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various database workloads.

Up to 3.3Ghz Intel 3rd generation (Ice Lake) Xeon Gold 6342 Processor Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory Up to 12.5 Gbps of networking speed

ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
Standardredis1v1m21 vCore2 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v8m1288 vCore128 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardredis1v12m19212 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standardredis1v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standardredis1v16m25616 vCore256 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) server type specification - redis1 server type

css1 server type

The css1 server type of CacheStore(DBaaS) is provided with standard specifications (vCPU, Memory) and is suitable for various database workloads.

Up to 3.3Ghz Intel 3rd generation (Ice Lake) Xeon Gold 6342 Processor Supports up to 16 vCPUs and 256 GB of memory Up to 12.5 Gbps of networking speed

ClassificationServer TypevCPUMemoryNetwork Bandwidth
Standardcss1v1m21 vCore2 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v2m42 vCore4 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v2m82 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v2m162 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v2m242 vCore24 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v4m84 vCore8 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v4m164 vCore16 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v4m324 vCore32 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v4m484 vCore48 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v4m644 vCore64 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v6m726 vCore72 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v6m966 vCore96 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v8m1288 vCore128 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v10m16010 vCore160 GBUp to 10 Gbps
Standardcss1v12m19212 vCore192 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standardcss1v14m22414 vCore224 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Standardcss1v16m25616 vCore256 GBUp to 12.5 Gbps
Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) server type specification - css1 server type

6.1.2 - Monitoring Metrics

CacheStore(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

The following table shows the performance monitoring metrics of CacheStore(DBaaS) that can be checked through Cloud Monitoring. For detailed instructions on using Cloud Monitoring, refer to the Cloud Monitoring guide.

For server monitoring metrics of CacheStore(DBaaS), refer to the Virtual Server Monitoring Metrics guide.

Performance ItemDetailed DescriptionUnit
Active Defragmentation Keys [Hits]Number of keys defragmentedcnt
Active Defragmentation Keys [Miss]Number of keys skipped in the active defragmentation processcnt
Active Defragmentationd [Hits]Number of value reassignments performed by the active defragmentation processcnt
Active Defragmentations [Miss]Number of value reassignments started and aborted by the active defragmentation processcnt
Allocated Bytes [OS]Number of bytes allocated by CacheStore(DBaaS) and recognized by the operating system (resident set size)bytes
Allocated Bytes [Redis]Total number of bytes allocated by CacheStore(DBaaS)bytes
AOF Buffer SizeAOF buffer sizebytes
AOF File Size [Current]Current AOF file sizebytes
AOF File Size [Lastest Startup]AOF file size at the latest startup or rewritebytes
AOF Rewrite Buffer SizeAOF rewrite buffer sizebytes
AOF Rewrite Current TimeTime of the ongoing AOF rewrite operation, if anysec
AOF Rewrite Last TimeTime of the last AOF rewrite operationsec
CallsNumber of calls that reached command execution (not rejected)cnt
Changes [Last Saved]Number of changes since the last dumpcnt
Client Output Buffer [MAX]Longest output list among current client connectionscnt
Clients [Sentinel]Number of client connections (Sentinel)cnt
Connected SlavesNumber of connected slavescnt
Connections [Blocked]Number of clients waiting for blocking calls (BLPOP, BRPOP, BRPOPLPUSH)cnt
Connections [Current]Number of client connections (excluding slave connections)cnt
Copy On Write Allocated Size [AOF]COW allocation size during the last RDB save operationbytes
Copy On Write Allocated Size [RDB]COW allocation size during the last RDB save operationbytes
CPU Time [Average]Average CPU time used per command executioncnt
CPU Time [Total]Total CPU time used by these commandsusec
CPU Usage [System Process]System CPU usage by background processes%
CPU Usage [System]System CPU usage by the CacheStore(DBaaS) server%
CPU Usage [User Process]User CPU usage by background processes%
CPU Usage [User]System CPU usage by background processes%
Dataset UsedDataset sizebytes
Disk UsedDatadir usageMB
Evicted KeysNumber of evicted keys due to maxmemory limitcnt
Fsyncs [Delayed]Delayed fsync countercnt
Fsyncs [Pending]Number of fsync operations pending in the background I/O queuecnt
Full ResyncsNumber of full resynchronizations with slavescnt
Keys [Expired]Total number of key expiration eventscnt
Keys [Keyspace]Number of keys in the keyspacecnt
Lastest Fork Duration TimeTime of the latest fork (fork) operationusec
Lookup Keys [Hit]Number of successful key lookups in the main dictionarycnt
Lookup Keys [Miss]Number of failed key lookups in the main dictionarycnt
Lua Engine Memory UsedMemory used by the Lua enginebytes
Master Last Interaction Time AgoTime since the last interaction with the mastersec
Master Last Interaction Time Ago [Sync]Time since the last interaction with the mastersec
Master OffsetCurrent replication offset of the serverpid
Master Second OffsetOffset until the replication ID is acceptedpid
Master Sync Left BytesNumber of bytes left to synchronizebytes
Memory Fragmentation RateRatio of used_memory_rss to used_memory%
Memory Fragmentation Rate [Allocator]Fragmentation ratio%
Memory Fragmentation UsedDifference between used_memory_rss and used_memory in bytesbytes
Memory Fragmentation Used [Allocator]Resident bytesbytes
Memory Max ValueMemory limitbytes
Memory Resident [Allocator]Resident memorybytes
Memory RSS Rate [Allocator]Resident ratio%
Memory Used [Active]Active memorybytes
Memory Used [Allocated]Allocated memorybytes
Memory Used [Resident]Resident bytesbytes
Network In Bytes [Total]Total network input (bytes)bytes
Network Out Bytes [Total]Total network output (bytes)bytes
Network Read RateNetwork read rate per second (KB/sec)cnt
Network Write RateNetwork write rate per second (KB/sec)cnt
Partial Resync Requests [Accepted]Number of accepted partial resynchronization requestscnt
Partial Resync Requests [Denied]Number of denied partial resynchronization requestscnt
Peak Memory ConsumedMaximum memory used by CacheStore(DBaaS)bytes
Processed CommandsNumber of commands processed per secondcnt
Processed Commands [Total]Total number of processed commandscnt
Pub/Sub ChannelsGlobal number of pub/sub channels with client subscriptionscnt
Pub/Sub PatternsGlobal number of pub/sub patterns with client subscriptionscnt
RDB Saved Duration Time [Current]Time of the ongoing RDB save operation, if anysec
RDB Saved Duration Time [Last]Time of the last RDB save operationsec
Received Connections [Total]Total number of received connectionscnt
Rejected Connections [Total]Total number of rejected connectionscnt
Replication Backlog Actove CountFlag indicating whether replication backlog is activecnt
Replication Backlog Master OffsetMaster offset of the replication backlog buffercnt
Replication Backlog SizeSize of data in the replication backlog bufferbytes
Replication Backlog Size [Total]Total size of the replication backlog bufferbytes
Slave PriorityPriority of the server as a failover targetcnt
Slave Replication OffsetReplication offset of the slave serverpid
Slow OperationsNumber of slow operationscnt
Sockets [MIGRATE]Number of sockets open for migrationcnt
Tracked Keys [Expiry]Number of keys tracked for expiration (only for writable slaves)cnt
Instance Status [PID]PID of the redis-server processpid
Sentinel Status [PID]PID of the sentinel processpid
Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Monitoring Metrics

6.2 - How-to guides

Users can create CacheStore(DBaaS) by entering required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Creating CacheStore(DBaaS)

You can create and use CacheStore(DBaaS) service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Notice

Before creating a service, configure the VPC Subnet type as General.

  • If the Subnet type is Local, the Database service cannot be created.

To create CacheStore(DBaaS), follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create CacheStore(DBaaS) button. It moves to the Create CacheStore(DBaaS) page.
  3. On the Create CacheStore(DBaaS) page, enter the information required for service creation and select detailed options.
    • Select the required information in the Image and Version Selection area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Image VersionRequiredProvides version list of CacheStore(DBaaS)
      Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Image and Version Selection Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Entry area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      Server Name PrefixRequiredServer name where Redis/Valkey will be installed
      • Start with lowercase English letters, enter 3 to 13 characters using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-)
      • Actual server name is created with a postfix like 001, 002 based on the server name
      Cluster NameRequiredCluster name where Redis/Valkey is installed
      • Enter 3 to 20 characters using English
      • Cluster is a unit that bundles multiple servers
      Service Type > Server TypeRequiredServer type where Redis/Valkey will be installed
      • Standard: Standard specification commonly used
      Service Type > Planned ComputeRequiredResource status with Planned Compute set
      • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute set that are in use
      • Settings: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
      • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by resource-based Planned Compute
      • Create Planned Compute Service: Move to Planned Compute service application page
      Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage setting used by DB according to purpose
      • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
      • DATA: Storage area for table data and archive files, etc.
        • Select storage type then enter capacity. (For more information by Block Storage type, see Creating Block Storage)
          • SSD: High-performance general volume
          • HDD: General volume
          • SSD_KMS, HDD_KMS: Additional encrypted volume using Samsung Cloud Platform KMS (Key Management System) encryption key
        • Set Storage type is applied equally to additional storage
        • Enter capacity in multiples of 8 within the range of 16 to 5,120
      High AvailabilityOptionalHigh Availability (HA) configuration
      • If using HA configuration, provided as Master-Replica configuration with 1 or 2 replicas
      • Sentinel Port Number: Port number used when connecting to Sentinel
        • Port for Master-Replica communication, enter within the range of 1200 to 65535
      • Replica Count: Number of replicas to configure
        • If selecting 1, configured as Master-Replica-Sentinel
        • If selecting 2, configured as Master-Replica-Replica, and Sentinel is automatically installed on the server where Redis is installed
        • Sentinel server type is set to minimum specification
      NetworkRequiredNetwork where CacheStore(DBaaS) is installed
      • Select and connect to pre-created VPC and Subnet
      • Only automatic IP generation is possible
      Network > Common SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in the service are installed
      • Select if you want to apply the same settings to all installed servers
      • Select pre-created VPC and Subnet
        • Only automatic IP generation is possible
      Network > Per Server SettingsRequiredNetwork settings where servers created in the service are installed
      • Select if you want to apply different settings for each installed server
      • Select pre-created VPC and Subnet, IP, Public NAT
        • Enter IP for each server
        • Public NAT function is only available when VPC is connected to Internet Gateway. If you check Use, you can select from IPs reserved in Public IP of VPC product. For more information, see Creating Public IP
      IP Access ControlOptionalService access policy setting
      • Since access policy is set for the IP entered on the page, you don’t need to set Security Group policy separately
      • Enter in IP format (example: 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (example: 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32) and click the Add button
      • To delete the entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
      Maintenance PeriodOptionalCacheStore(DBaaS) maintenance period
      • If selecting Use, set day of week, start time, and duration
      • It is recommended to set the maintenance period for stable DB management. Patch work is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
      • If set to not used, Samsung SDS is not responsible for problems caused by not applying patches.
      Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Service Configuration Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Database Configuration Required Information Entry area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      BackupOptionalBackup usage
      • If selecting Use, set backup file retention period and backup start time
      • Separate fees are charged for backup files depending on capacity
        • File retention period can be set from 7 days to 35 days
      • The minutes when backup is performed are set randomly, and backup end time cannot be set
      Redis/Valkey Port NumberRequiredPort number required for Redis/Valkey connection
      • Enter port within the range of 1200 to 65535
      Redis/Valkey PasswordRequiredPassword required for Redis/Valkey connection
      • Enter 8 to 30 characters including English letters, numbers, and special characters (excluding $ " )
      Redis/Valkey Password ConfirmationRequiredRe-enter password identically
      ParameterRequiredParameters to use for Redis/Valkey
      • Click the View button to check detailed information of parameters
      • After creation is complete, parameter modification is possible, and DB restart is required after modification
      Time ZoneRequiredTime zone where Database will be used
      Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Database Configuration Items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Entry area.
      Classification
      Required
      Detailed Description
      TagsOptionalAdd tags
      • Can add up to 50 per resource
      • Click the Add Tag button then enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Additional Information Entry Items
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.

Checking CacheStore(DBaaS) Detailed Information

CacheStore(DBaaS) service allows you to check and modify the entire resource list and detailed information. The CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page consists of Detailed Information, Tags, Operation History tabs.

To check the detailed information of CacheStore(DBaaS) service, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to check detailed information. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page.
    • At the top of the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page, status information and additional function information are displayed.
      ClassificationDetailed Description
      Cluster StatusCluster status where Redis is installed
      • Creating: Cluster is being created
      • Editing: Cluster is changing to Operation execution state
      • Error: State where error occurred while cluster is performing operation
        • If it occurs continuously, contact administrator
      • Failed: State where cluster failed during creation process
      • Restarting: State where cluster is being restarted
      • Running: State where cluster is operating normally
      • Starting: State where cluster is starting
      • Stopped: State where cluster is stopped
      • Stopping: State where cluster is in stop state
      • Synchronizing: State where cluster is synchronizing
      • Terminating: State where cluster is being deleted
      • Unknown: State where cluster status is unknown
        • If it occurs continuously, contact administrator
      Cluster ControlButtons to change cluster status
      • Start: Start stopped cluster
      • Stop: Stop running cluster
      • Restart: Restart running cluster
      • Switch-Over: Switch Replica cluster to Master
      More Additional FunctionsCluster-related management buttons
      • Sync Service Status: Check real-time Redis/Valkey service status
      • Backup History: If backup is set, check backup normal execution status and history
      • Database Recovery: Recover DB based on specific point in time
      • Parameter Management: Check and modify Redis/Valkey configuration parameters
      • Rename-Command: Change name of Redis/Valkey Command
      Service TerminationButton to terminate service
      Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Status Information and Additional Functions

Detailed Information

On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, you can check the detailed information of the selected resource and modify information if necessary.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Server InformationServer information configured in the cluster
  • Category: Server type (Master, Replica, Sentinel)
  • Server Name: Server name
  • IP:Port: Server IP and port
  • Status: Server status
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • For DB service, means cluster SRN
Resource NameResource name
  • For DB service, means cluster name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
CreatorUser who created the service
Creation DateDate and time when the service was created
ModifierUser who modified the service information
Modification DateDate and time when the service information was modified
Image VersionInstalled Redis/Valkey image and version information
  • If minor version upgrade is needed, click the Edit icon to set
Cluster NameCluster name where Redis/Valkey servers are configured
Planned ComputeResource status with Planned Compute set
Maintenance PeriodDB patch work period setting status
  • If maintenance period setting is needed, click the Edit icon to set
BackupBackup setting status
  • If backup setting is needed, click the Edit icon to set
Redis/Valkey Port NumberPort number required for Redis/Valkey connection
Time ZoneRedis/Valkey time zone
Sentinel Port NumberPort number for Master and Replica communication
VIPVirtual IP information
  • Only available when high availability is set
NetworkNetwork information where CacheStore(DBaaS) is installed (VPC, Subnet)
IP Access ControlService access policy setting
  • If IP addition and deletion are needed, click the Edit icon to set
Master & ReplicaMaster, Replica server type, Basic OS, Additional Disk information
  • If server type modification is needed, click the Edit icon next to server type to set
  • If server type is modified, server restart is required. Please check SW license modification matters or SW settings and application due to specification change separately.
SentinelSentinel server type, Basic OS information
  • Available when selecting 1 replica during HA configuration
Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Database Detailed Information Items

Tags

On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, you can check the tag information of the selected resource and add, change, or delete it.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Tag ListTag list
  • Can check Key, Value information of tags
  • Can add up to 50 tags per resource
  • When entering tags, search and select from existing Key and Value lists
Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Tag Tab Items

Operation History

You can check the operation history of the selected resource on the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.

ClassificationDetailed Description
Operation History ListResource change history
  • Can check operation date, resource ID, resource name, operation details, event topic, operation result, operator information
  • To perform detailed search, click the Detailed Search button
Table. CacheStore(DBaaS) Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Managing CacheStore(DBaaS) Resources

If you need to change existing configuration options of created CacheStore(DBaaS) resources or perform recovery, command changes, etc., you can perform operations on the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page.

Controlling Operation

If changes occur in running CacheStore(DBaaS) resources, you can start, stop, or restart. Also, if configured with HA, you can switch Master-Replica servers through Switch-over.

To control CacheStore(DBaaS) operation, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to control operation. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Check CacheStore status and complete changes through the control buttons below.
    • Start: CacheStore service installed server and CacheStore service will run (Running).
    • Stop: CacheStore service installed server and CacheStore service can stop (Stopped).
    • Restart: Can restart only CacheStore service.
    • Switch Over: Can switch Master server and Replica server.

Syncing Service Status

You can sync the real-time service status of CacheStore(DBaaS).

To check CacheStore(DBaaS) service status, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to check service status. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Sync Service Status button. While retrieving, the cluster changes to Synchronizing status.
  5. When retrieval is complete, the status is updated in the server information item, and the cluster changes to Running status.

Changing Server Type

You can change the configured server type.

Caution
If you modify the server type, server restart is required. Please check SW license modification matters or SW settings and application due to server specification change separately.

To change the server type, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to change server type. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of the server type you want to change at the bottom of detailed information. The Edit Server Type popup window opens.
  5. In the Edit Server Type popup window, select the server type and click the OK button.

Terminating CacheStore(DBaaS)

You can reduce operating costs by terminating unused CacheStore(DBaaS). However, if you terminate the service, the running service may stop immediately, so you should proceed with termination after fully considering the impact caused by service interruption.

To terminate CacheStore(DBaaS), follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, select the resource to terminate and click the Terminate Service button.
  4. When termination is complete, check if the resource is terminated on the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.

6.2.1 - Managing CacheStore Service

Users can manage CacheStore(DBaaS) through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Managing Parameters

Provides a feature to easily view and modify database configuration parameters.

Viewing Parameters

To view configuration parameters, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to view and modify parameters. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Parameter Management button. The Parameter Management popup window opens.
  5. Click the View button in the Parameter Management popup window. The View Notification popup window opens.
  6. When the View Notification popup window opens, click the OK button. It takes some time to view.

Modifying Parameters

To modify configuration parameters, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to view and modify parameters. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Parameter Management button. The Parameter Management popup window opens.
  5. Click the View button in the Parameter Management popup window. The View Notification popup window opens.
  6. When the View Notification popup window opens, click the OK button. It takes some time to view.
  7. If modification is needed, click the Edit button and enter modification contents in the user-defined value area of the parameter to be modified.
  8. When input is complete, click the Complete button.

Changing Command Name

Caution
When Rename-Command is applied, the service is interrupted due to CacheStore(DBaaS) restart.

Provides Redis OSS/Valkey Command viewing and Command name modification features. To view and modify Command names, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to modify Command name. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the More button and click the Rename-Command button. It moves to the Rename-Command page.
  5. Click the View button on the Rename-Command page. The View Notification popup window opens.
  6. When the View Notification popup window opens, click the OK button. It takes some time to view.
  7. If modification is needed, click the Edit button and enter modification contents in the user-defined value area of the Command to be modified.
  8. When input is complete, click the Complete button.

Upgrading Minor Version

Provides version upgrade feature for some function improvements and security patches. Only minor version upgrade function within the same Major version is supported.

Caution
Please check the service status first through service status sync, then perform version upgrade.

To upgrade Minor Version, follow these steps:

  1. Click the All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page.
  3. On the CacheStore(DBaaS) List page, click the resource to upgrade version. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) Details page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of the Image Version item. The Version Upgrade popup window opens.
  5. Select the upgrade version in the Version Upgrade popup window and click the OK button.
  6. Click the OK button in the Version Upgrade Notification popup window.

6.2.2 - CacheStore Backup and Recovery

The user can set up backups of CacheStore(DBaaS) through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and recover with the backed-up files.

CacheStore(DBaaS) backup

CacheStore(DBaaS) provides a data backup function based on its own backup command. It also provides an optimized backup environment for data protection and management through backup history check and backup file deletion functions.

Setting up backup

The method for setting up a backup for CacheStore(DBaaS) is described in CacheStore(DBaaS) creation guide, please refer to it.

To modify the backup settings of the generated resource, follow these steps.

Caution

If backup is set, backup will be performed at the specified time after the set time, and additional fees will be incurred depending on the backup capacity.

  • If the backup setting is changed to unset, the backup operation will be stopped immediately, and the stored backup data will be deleted and can no longer be used.
  1. All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu, click. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) list page.
  3. CacheStore(DBaaS) list page, click the resource to set the backup. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) detail page.
  4. Click the Edit icon of the backup item. The Backup Settings popup window opens.
  5. If you set up a backup, click Use in the Backup Settings popup window, select the retention period, backup start time, and Archive backup cycle, and then click the OK button.
    • If you want to stop the backup setting, uncheck Use in the Backup Setting popup window and click the OK button.

Check Backup History

Notice
To set up notifications for backup success and failure, you can set them up through the Notification Manager product. For detailed usage guidelines on setting up notification policies, please refer to Creating a Notification Policy.

To check the backup history, follow these steps.

  1. Click All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) list page.
  3. CacheStore(DBaaS) list page, click the resource to check the backup history. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) details page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup window opens.
  5. Backup History popup window where you can check the backup status, version, backup start time, backup completion time, and capacity.

Deleting Backup Files

To delete the backup history, follow these steps.

Caution
Backup files cannot be restored after deletion. Please make sure to check if the data is unnecessary before deleting it.
  1. Click All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) list page.
  3. CacheStore(DBaaS) list page, click the resource to check the backup history. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) detail page.
  4. Click the Backup History button. The Backup History popup window opens.
  5. Backup History popup window, check the file you want to delete and click the Delete button.

CachStore(DBaaS) recovery

In the event of a failure or data loss, where recovery from a backup file is necessary, the recovery function allows recovery based on a specific point in time.

To recover CacheStore(DBaaS), follow these steps.

  1. Click All Services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) list page.
  3. CacheStore(DBaaS) list page, click the resource you want to restore. It moves to the CacheStore(DBaaS) details page.
  4. Click the Database Recovery button. It moves to the Database Recovery page.
  5. After entering information in the Database recovery configuration area, click the Complete button.
Classification
Necessity
Detailed Description
Recovery TypeRequiredUser sets the point in time to recover
  • Recover based on backup files, and select from the list of backup file timestamps displayed
Server name prefixRequiredServer name of the recovery DB
  • Start with lowercase English letters, using lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (-) to enter 3 to 16 characters
  • A postfix such as 001, 002 is attached based on the server name to create the actual server name
Cluster NameRequiredCluster name of the recovery DB
  • Enter in English, 3-20 characters
  • A cluster is a unit that bundles multiple servers
Service Type > Server TypeRequiredServer type where the recovery DB will be installed
  • Standard: Standard specification commonly used
  • High Capacity: High-capacity server with 24vCore or more (to be provided later)
Service Type > Planned ComputeSelectionCurrent status of resources with Planned Compute set
  • In Use: Number of resources with Planned Compute set that are in use
  • Settings: Number of resources with Planned Compute set
  • Coverage Preview: Amount applied by resource-based Planned Compute
  • Create Planned Compute Service: Move to the Planned Compute service application page
Service Type > Block StorageRequiredBlock Storage setting used by recovery DB
  • Basic OS: Area where DB engine is installed
  • DATA: Area where files such as AOF (Append Only File) and RDB (Redis Database) are stored
    • Applied equally to the storage type set in the original cluster
    • Capacity can be entered in multiples of 8 within the range of 56 to 5,120
Redis/Valkey Port numberrequiredRedis/Valkey Port number set in the original DB
IP Access ControlSelectSet service access policy
  • Set access policy for the IP entered on the page, so you don’t need to set Security Group policy separately
  • Enter in IP format (e.g., 192.168.10.1) or CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24, 192.168.10.1/32) and click the Add button
  • To delete the entered IP, click the x button next to the entered IP
Maintenance periodSelectCacheStore(DBaaS) DB maintenance period
  • Use is selected, set the day of the week, start time, and duration
  • It is recommended to set the maintenance period for stable DB management. Patch work is performed at the set time and service interruption occurs
  • If not used, Samsung SDS is not responsible for problems that occur due to non-application of patches.
TagSelectionAdd Tag
  • Click the Add Tag button and enter or select Key, Value
Fig. CacheStore(DBaaS) recovery configuration items

6.2.3 - CacheStore(DBaaS) server connection

Scenario Overview

CacheStore(DBaaS) connection scenario is a scenario where Bastion host (Virtual Server) and Database service are created, and the DB service is accessed through the Bastion host. To connect to CacheStore (DBaaS) stably in the Samsung Cloud Platform environment, it is necessary to create a Bastion host and use it for network connection. To maintain a stable and high level of security, it is recommended to configure the Database service in a Private Subnet environment and configure the Bastion host in a limited Public Subnet environment.

This scenario largely describes the process of creating a Bastion host and Database service, and configuring the network environment for Bastion host and Database connection, allowing access through a DB connection client.

Architecture
Figure. CacheStore(DBaaS) server connection architecture

Scenario Components

You can configure the scenario using the following services.

Service Group
Service
Detailed Description
NetworkingVPCA service that provides an independent virtual network in a cloud environment
NetworkingVPC > SubnetA service that allows users to subdivide the network according to purpose,size in VPC
NetworkingVPC > Public IPA service that reserves public IP and assigns and returns it to Compute resources
NetworkingVPC > Internet GatewayA service that connects VPC resources to the internet
NetworkingSecurity GroupA virtual firewall that controls the server’s traffic
DatabaseCacheStore(DBaaS)A service that easily creates and manages CacheStore in a web environment
ComputeVirtual ServerCloud computing optimized virtual server
ComputeVirtual Server > KeypairEncryption file used to connect to the Virtual Server
Table. Scenario Component List
Note
  • The default policy of Security Group is Deny All, so only allowed IPs should be registered.
  • In/Outbound’s All Open(Any IP, Any Port) policy can expose cloud resources to external threats.
    • By specifying the necessary IP and Port to set the policy, you can enhance security.

Scenario composition method

To configure the scenario, create the necessary services through the following procedure.

1. Configuring the Network

This describes the process of configuring the network environment for connecting to the Bastion Host and Database services.

1-1. Creating a VPC

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC button. It moves to the Create VPC page.
  3. VPC Creation page, please enter the information required for service creation.
    • IP range should be entered as 192.168.x.0/16.
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and then click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the VPC list page.

1-2. Creating a Subnet

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Subnet guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Service Home page, click the Subnet menu. It moves to the Subnet list page.
  3. Click the Subnet Creation button. It moves to the Subnet Creation page.
  4. Subnet Creation page where you enter the information needed to create a service.
    • Subnet type should be selected as General.
    • Please select a pre-created VPC.
    • IP range should be entered as 192.168.x.0/24.
  5. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Subnet list page.

1-3. Creating an Internet Gateway

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Internet Gateway guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. Move to the Internet Gateway list page.
  3. Click the Create Internet Gateway button. It moves to the Create Internet Gateway page.
  4. Internet Gateway creation page, please enter the required information necessary for service creation.
    • Please select a pre-created VPC.
    • Select Use in the Firewall usage item.
  5. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and the estimated charge amount, and then click the Complete button.
    • Once the creation is complete, check the created resource on the Internet Gateway list page.

1-4. Creating a Public IP

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > VPC > How-to guides > Public IP guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > VPC menu. It moves to the Service Home page of VPC.
  2. Service Home page, click the Public IP menu. It moves to the Public IP list page.
  3. Click the Public IP Reservation button. It moves to the Public IP Reservation page.
  4. Public IP Reservation page, please enter the required information necessary for service reservation.
  5. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and then click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Public IP list page.

1-5. Creating a Security Group

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Security Group.
  2. Service Home page, click the Create Security Group button. Move to the Create Security Group page.
  3. Security Group Creation page, please enter the required information necessary for service creation.
  4. Check the input information and click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Security Group list page

2. Creating a Bastion host

This describes the process of configuring the Bastion Host where the database connection client should be installed.

2-1. Creating a Server Keypair

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides > Keypair guide.
  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Service Home page, click the Keypair menu. It moves to the Keypair list page.
  3. Create Keypair button will be clicked. It moves to the Create Keypair page.
  4. Keypair creation page where you enter the required information necessary for service creation.
  5. Check the creation information and click the Complete button.
    • The key download is only available for the first time, and re-issuance is not provided.
    • Please make sure to store the downloaded key in a safe place.

2-2. Creating a Bastion Host

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Compute > Virtual Server > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Service Home page, click the Virtual Server creation button. Move to the Virtual Server creation page.
  3. Virtual Server Creation page, please enter the required information necessary for service creation.
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated billing amount, and click the Complete button.
    • Once the creation is complete, check the created resource on the Virtual Server list page.

2-3. Check Bastion host connection ID and PW

  1. Click All Services > Compute > Virtual Server menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Virtual Server.
  2. Service Home page, click the Virtual Server menu. Move to the Virtual Server list page.
  3. Virtual Server list page, click on the resource created in 2-2. Creating a Bastion Host. It moves to the detailed information page of the corresponding resource.
  4. Click the RDP password inquiry button in the Keypair item on the detailed information page. The RDP password inquiry popup window opens.
  5. RDP password inquiry popup window, attach the keypair file downloaded from 2-1. Creating Server Keypair.
  6. After attaching, click the Password confirmation button. The ID and password required to access the resource will be displayed.

3. Creating a Database

It describes the process of creating a Database service.

3-1. Creating CacheStore (DBaaS) Service

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click the All services > Database > CacheStore(DBaaS) menu. It moves to the Service Home page of CacheStore(DBaaS).
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create CacheStore(DBaaS) button. It moves to the Create CacheStore(DBaaS) page.
  3. Create CacheStore(DBaaS) page where you enter the required information needed for service creation.
    • Select and connect to the pre-created VPC and Subnet.
    • Enter database-related creation information on the essential information input screen.
    • Add the Bastion host IP to the IP access control item.
    • Database Port is 2866 by default, but users can also specify it.
  4. In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated charges, and then click the Complete button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the CacheStore(DBaaS) list page.

4. Setting Rules

This describes the process of setting rules for users to access the Bastion host and for the Bastion host to access the Database.

4-1. Security Group Add Security Rules

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > Security Group > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Security Group.
  2. Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. Move to the Security Group list page.
  3. Select the Security Group resource created in 1-5. Creating a Security Group. It moves to the detailed information page of the corresponding resource.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the detailed information page. It moves to the Rules tab.
  5. Rule tab, click the Add Rule button. It moves to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. In the Add Rule popup window, enter the following rules and click the OK button
DirectionRemoteTarget AddressProtocolPortDescription
InboundCIDRUser PC IPTCP3389 (RDP)Bastion connection PC → Bastion host
OutboundCIDRDB IPTCPDatabase Port (direct input)Bastion host → Database
Fig. Security Group security rules to be added

4-2. Adding IGW Firewall Rules

For detailed creation methods, please refer to the Networking > Firewall > How-to guides guide.
  1. Click All services > Networking > Firewall menu. It moves to the Service Home page of Firewall.
  2. Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. It moves to the Firewall list page.
  3. Firewall list page, select the Internet Gateway resource name created in 1-3. Creating an Internet Gateway. It moves to the detailed information page of the corresponding resource.
  4. Click the Rules tab on the detailed information page. It moves to the Rules tab.
  5. Rule tab, click the Add Rule button. Move to the Add Rule popup window.
  6. In the Add Rule popup window, enter the following rules and click the OK button.
Departure AddressDestination AddressProtocolPortActionDirectionDescription
Bastion connection PC IPBastion host IPTCP3389(RDP)AllowInboundUser PC → Bastion host
Fig. Internet Gateway Firewall rules to be added

5. Connecting to the Database

This explains the process of a user accessing the Database through a DB connection client program.

This guide provides instructions on how to connect using Another Redis Desktop Manager. There are various database client programs and CLI utilities, so you can also install and use the tools that are suitable for the user.

5-1. Connecting to the Bastion host

  1. Run Remote Desktop Connection in the Windows environment of the PC you want to connect to the Bastion host, enter the NAT IP of the Bastion Host, and click the Connect button.
  2. When the remote desktop connection is successful, the User Credential Input Window opens. Enter the ID and Password confirmed in 2-3. Check Bastion host connection ID and PW and click the Confirm button.

5-2. Install DB connection client program (Another Redis Desktop Manager) on the Bastion host

  1. Download another Redis Desktop Manager program.
  2. Connect the hard drive of the user PC to upload the file to the Bastion host.
  3. Click the Details button for local devices and resources items in the Local Resources tab of the remote desktop connection.
  4. Select the local disk where the file was downloaded to the drive and click the Confirm button.
  5. Download the file, copy it to the Bastion Host, and upload it, then click on the pgAdmin installation file to install it.

5-3. Using DB connection client program(Another Redis Desktop Manager) to connect to Database

  1. Run Another Redis Desktop Manager and click New Connection. The New Connection popup window will appear.
  2. New Connection popup window, enter the Database server information created in 3-1. Creating CacheStore(DBaaS) Service and click the OK button.
    Required Input Element ItemsInput Value
    HostDatabase Server IP
    PortDatabase Port
    PasswordDatabase password
    Connection NameCustom (ex. Service Name)
    DB Connection Client Program Input Items
  3. After connecting, you can perform basic information checks on Redis, data management, and CRUD operations on keys.

6.3 - API Reference

API

6.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

6.5 - Release Note

CacheStore(DBaaS)

2026.03.19
FEATURE Minor Version Upgrade Feature Added
  • Provides stable service continuity through the minor version upgrade feature.
2025.07.01
FEATURE User (Access Control) Management, DB Audit Log Export Feature Added, Backup Notification Feature Provided
  • CacheStore(DBaaS) feature added
    • New image added for CacheStore(DBaaS)
      • Support for open source Valkey image developed by forking Redis OSS
    • 2nd Generation Server Type added
      • Added 2nd generation (db2) server type based on Intel 4th generation (Sapphire Rapids) Processor. For more information, see CacheStore(DBaaS) Server Type
    • Backup notification feature provided
    • Added HDD, HDD_KMS types to Block Storage type
2025.02.27
FEATURE Common Feature Changes
  • Samsung Cloud Platform common feature changes
    • Reflected common CX changes such as Account, IAM and Service Home, Tags, etc.
2024.10.01
NEW CacheStore(DBaaS) Service Official Version Released
  • Changed the service name to CacheStore(DBaaS).
  • Added volume encrypted storage selection option to Block Storage type.
  • Added Role Switch (Active ↔ Standby) function for Active DB and Standby DB configured in redundancy.
  • Integrated with Cloud Monitoring Service to enable DB instance performance and log monitoring.
  • Planned Compute policy setting is available according to the server type selected by the customer.
2024.07.02
NEW Beta Version Released
  • Released Redis(DBaaS) service that allows easy creation and management of Redis OSS in a web environment.